Home

2009 PT Cruiser SedanCnvrt Owner Guide

Contents

1. FUSHAupio RND SET 815eb156 REF Radio Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is OFF and the ignition is ON 200 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL BENE Mode Button Radio Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you rel
2. 040105677 1 Air Vent 5 Radio 9 TRAC Off 13 Hazard Lights 2 Instrument Cluster 6 Assist Handle 10 Climate Controls 14 Rear Window Defrost 3 Power Windows 7 Glove Compartment 11 Storage Cubby 15 Side Mirror Control 4 Analog Clock 8 Heated Seats 12 Pass Air Bag Off If Equipped UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER BASE cC l 81c9daf8 160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER PREMIUM a T lt U b d 2 FM 101 1 10 81c9db05 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TURBO a E jj T n p 1 888888 ore D 9 O 81c9dd12 162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS CAUTION 1 Fuel Gauge When the ignition switch is in the ON position the pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel tank Driving with a hot engine cooling system could damage your vehicle If temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops 2 Fuel Door Reminder back into the normal range If the pointer remains on This is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is located on the H and you hear continuous chimes turn the the front passenger s right side of the vehicle engine off immediately
3. 385 Prepare For The Appointment 383 Service Contract 0 eee ee eee 385 Prepare A Lists seek rede sine Che 383 W Warranty Information U S Vehicles Only 386 Be Reasonable With Requests 383 BMOPAR Parts 000004 386 H If You Need Assistance lesse 383 W Reporting Safety Defects lesse 386 Chrysler LLC Customer Center 384 In The 50 United States And Washington Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center 384 M E ane 9 In Mexico Coritact a css see mmn 384 I CARO nas dido ospebert iras ss d 382 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Bi Publication Order Forms isses 387 Traction Grades v4 ew ku cr RE YS 389 ll Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire Temperature Grades 00 390 Quality Grades scs cer na 389 Treadwear lees 389 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 383 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The Appointment If you re having warranty work done be sure to have the right papers with you Take your warranty folder AII work to be performed may not be covered by the warranty Discuss additional charges with the service manager Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle s service history This can often provide a clue to the current problem Prepare A List Make a written list of your vehicle s problems or the specific work you want done If
4. Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air condi tioning system Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode injuring you Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail requiring costly repairs Refer to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for further warranty information The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure To avoid risk of personal injury or damage to the system adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected should be done by an experienced repairman Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling R 134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluoro carbon HFC that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone saving product How ever the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by dealers or other service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment NOTE Use only manufacturer approved A C System Sealers Stop Leak Products Seal Conditioners Compres sor Oil or Refrigerants Body Lubrication Locks and all body pivot points including such items as seat tracks door hinge pivot points and rollers liftgate tailgate sliding doors and hood hinges should be lubri cated periodically with a lithium based grease such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet easy opera tion and to protect against rust and wear Prior to t
5. 06 386 Washer Rear 0 0 00 0 ee ee es 151 Washers Windshield 126 Washing Vehicle ose Er ek eas angie ae 336 Water Driving Through s seyor emis arati aniy 235 Wheel and Wheel Trim 337 Wheel and Wheel Trim Care Ls 337 Wind Buffeting llle 33 140 Window Fogging 0 6 0c eee 217 WindOWS ss cag taneacteeredeswat ayaa s 31 Windshield Washers llus 126 321 PMU ETE 321 Windshield Wipers 000005 126 321 Wiper Rear cas sek age x bem bee RR aoe 151 Wipers Intermittent llle 127 YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure 338 INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING EQUIPMENT Special design considerations are incorporated into this vehicle s electronic system to provide immunity to radio frequency signals Mobile two way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person nel The following must be observed during installation The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible The negative power connection should be made to body sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection This connection should not be fused Antennas for two way radios should be mounted on the roof or the rear area of the vehicle Care should be used in mounting antennas with magnet bases Magnets may affect the accuracy or operation of the comp
6. In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect you should contact the Customer Service Department imme diately Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should write to Transport Canada Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls 2780 Sheffield Road Ottawa Ontario K1B 3V9 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To order the following manuals you may use either the website or the phone numbers listed below Visa Mas tercard American Express and Discover orders are ac cepted If you prefer mailing your payment please call for an order form NOTE A street address is required when ordering manuals no P O Boxes e Service Manuals These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the information that students and professional technicians need in diagnosing troubleshooting problem solving maintaining servicing and repairing Chrysler LLC 388 vehicles A complete working knowledge of the ve hicle system and or components is written in straightforward language with illustrations diagrams and charts Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with dia grams charts and detailed illustrations These practi cal manuals make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix problems on computer controlled ve hicle systems and features They show exactly how to find and correct problems the first time using step by step troubleshootin
7. 0 000200 eee 261 Reporting Safety Defects 00 386 Restraints Child 0 0 0 0 00 cee nee 61 67 Restraints Infant 0 0 00 eee een is 61 Rotation Tires e uode ek eee eeu EE 263 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle 71 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle 71 Safety Defects Reporting 386 Safety Information Tire 06 245 Safety TIPS cs scuwactasotealy kona Perm a SR RO dotes 70 Satellite Radio 2 2 eee eee 206 Satellite Radio Antenna 45 209 Schedule Maintenance 0000 354 Seat Belt Maintenance llle 340 Seat Belt Reminder 00005 43 Seat Belts Adjustable Shoulder Belt 0 42 Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage 42 And Pregnant Women 0000 44 Child Restraint 00000000000 61 Front Seat ib ep REPRE 36 Pretensioners llle 43 Rear beat x i ea ro er REESE 36 404 INDEX aaa Untwisting Procedure 0000 42 Seat Belts Sedan llle 35 DOdlS s huc ad exe nuc Gas rp um Ne Ri Eee S 107 Cleaning i9 84h Gb t retene IU Eee doe 338 Emergency Seat Back Release Sedan 152 Folding Front Passenger 110 Head Restraints llle 11 Heated 222b RR PR 11 Lumbar Support 0 000 000 ae 110 POWe sede bee x cS SEL be ead Feed eae 108 Rear Folding uis iue oe derer acta 11
8. 1 0 2 0 2 0 eee 30 DOOR 4 icu eatin Wa es 9 UR ae ale SUR a hs 27 Power DOO i a ese ee REDE Rs 28 Steering Wheel cessos bm Eee ens 14 Low Tire Pressure System 004 264 Lubrication Body veoga 6 ee 320 Lumbar Support ceses sss n ns 110 Maintenance Free Battery 4 318 Maintenance General lessen 314 Maintenance Procedures llle 314 Maintenance Schedule Schedule A Non Turbo less 369 Schedule A Turbo lesen 374 ScheduleB x puo 24 SSS Sead P E des 357 Schedule B All Engines lisse 357 Maintenance Schedules liess 354 Malfunction Indicator Light Check Engine 166 311 Manual Service llle 387 Manual Transaxle less 222 225 334 Downshifting se sees sa SE aae ee a eee 227 Fluid Level Check llle 334 en INDEX 401 Frequency of Fluid Change 33b Odometer oss vegies nee tive me ea ee es ees Lubricant Selection 00040 334 pop Map Reading Lights iliis 120 Oil Engine 22 deber RR Ee Master Cylinder Brakes 04 330 Capacity na eyed 8 rdc Reb PE Red Methanol arises sce Kasaean i as 269 Change Interval 42 ek mm RR Mini Trip Computer iest eaae a 00000000 172 Checking si Ae a wes ee ree Eee rs IMIETOLS cacera cargadi aoo p RU ara e Rr SUR Rs 77 Disposal sessirnir d nne de uik md Electric Remote 222 22 78 Filter ETT Outside i
9. i 6 o6 nim 9g noe uim iis Ro cR Use 9 8 9 SUPCR CR UR ELAD e 6 8 C8 S own 2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE cc ccceccccccccccccecccs 3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 2 cc ccc cece mnn 4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2 cece ccc ecc eee hn nn 5 STARTING AND OPERATING 2 ccc cece cee c cee r ewer hh 9 mtn e WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 2 cece cece cree cree cree cence hh hn 7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443599459999 93599499 v 9e vy e rev p Y OT a des 8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES cece ccc recs recs see nn 9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 2 cece cece cece creer ccc crc hh hh 10 INDEX 4 9 huma ERI Sire E HEU A RR e Gnd E qoa 8 03 97909 ACA AURA RU E o d Roe ique teaks INTRODUCTION CONTENTS E Introduction sseen nA 4 W Vehicle Identification Number 6 Bl How To Use This Manual 4 Bl Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Bl Warnings And Cautions 004 6 4 INTRODUCTION EE INTRODUCTION This Owner s Manual has been prepared with the assis tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and various customer oriented documents You are urged to read these publications carefully Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help assure
10. iacu a prp d RETE 269 Gauge cee se db bx ey x r9 EX reg 162 Light 2 oer ree e ie oe eus d 170 Materials Added llle 271 Methanol as uie Rn e Peces 269 Octane Rating 6 kanibi itenei 269 Requirements se canes naaa daneen ia g kinei 269 Tank Capacity ike dre iois 350 Fuel System Caution 0000000 274 Fueling xev eet rece arenae dd ped 273 FUSES desee RESTI Aa Gee nih ER 341 Garage Door Opener HomeLink 132 Gas Cap Fuel Filler Cap 273 275 311 Gasoline Clean Air 2 0 ce eee eee 269 Gasoline Fuel llle 269 350 Gasoline Reformulated 269 Gauges Coolant Temperature 0000 162 Fuel 26644 203 bade wa pained er ea eek ia 162 Odometer eee eee eee 165 Tachometer srs oz aha ds oes DE EDS ers 163 General Information 18 107 268 10 398 INDEX MM General Maintenance lille 314 Glass Cleaning 6 0 6 eee ee eee 339 Gross Axle Weight Rating 0 278 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating 276 277 Hands Free Phone UConnect 80 Hazard Driving Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water soc ies ke com Re Ree n 235 Hazard Warning Flasher 292 Head Restraints e dara ba Rd 111 Headlights Bulb Replacement 004 346 Cleaning p a pepe EA UP ACRES RU 339 High Beam ssepe were dam le dex oes 124 High Beam L
11. t Replace the make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension MM x lt Flush and replace the engine coolant if not re placed at 60 months M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 372 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Miles 108 000 114 000 120 000 126 000 132 000 138 000 Kilometers 180 000 190 000 200 000 210 000 220 000 230 000 Months 108 114 120 126 132 138 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary 1 Replace the air cleaner filter Replace the generator belt Replace power steering air conditioning belt Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not done at 102 000 miles 200 000 kg Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables Replace the make up air filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 KJK K XK xK x xXx ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 373 This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer f This maintenance is not required if previously replaced to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis Inspection and service should also be performed anytime sions warranty a malfunction is
12. Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter gt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary t Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months if not replaced at 102 000 miles 200 000 km Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables x x lt lt gt lt lt gt lt 366 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Miles 123 000 126 000 129 000 132 000 135 000 Kilometers 205 000 210 000 215 000 220 000 225 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at three months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X necessary M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 367 M A Miles 138 000 141 000 144 000 147 000 150 000 Kilometers 230 000 235 000 240 000 245 000 250 000 l Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X N placed at three months A Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with X S four wheel disc brakes C Replace the engine air cleaner filter X d Adjust the generator belt tension X D Replace the spark plugs X y Change the manual transaxle fluid t X E Replace the make up air filter X
13. Lights Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights while you work the controls Check turn signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel 72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid Leaks Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel engine coolant oil or other fluid leaks Also if gasoline fumes are detected or fuel power steering fluid or brake fluid leaks are suspected the cause should be located and corrected immediately UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS la Mitrors searen hc RR ERR 77 Inside Day Night Mirror 77 Outside Mirror Driver Side 77 Outside Mirror Passenger Side 78 Power Mirrors If Equipped 78 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped 78 Sun Visor Sliding Feature 79 lll Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped 2 5224 tese bx RE PEU IRAE RA 80 Operations a3 asetex rcm Fa CR dee er 82 Phone Call Features UConnect System Features 92 Advanced Phone Connectivity 97 Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System llle 99 General Information 107 ho re TIT 107 Front Seat Adjustment If Equipped 107 Six Way Power Seat With Manual Recliner Tf Eq ipped sec
14. Outlet Auxiliary Electrical Outlet 141 DEAS i ig DT 108 Steering oes es sia e ma e ord d 238 SuntOOf ose sisi seas swiss aka ox donde 139 WindOWS ue eR Re Rex Yes 31 Pregnant Women and Seat Belts 44 Preparation for Jacking 00 296 Pretensioners Seat Belts a rs ed eae Ene ake 43 Programmable Electronic Features 179 Programming Transmitters Remote Keyless Entry lille 24 Radial Ply Tires 5s eee ch ed kd 257 Radiator Cap Coolant Pressure Cap 327 Radio Operation 00 185 199 210 Radio Satellite iier RR REY Ya eae 206 Radio Sound Systems 0 185 199 Rear Liftgate Sedan 000 33 Rear Seat Folding 0004 112 114 Rear Seat Removal lesse 117 Rear Shelf Panel 145 en INDEX 403 Rear Window 46466 eee par ea d x eae ae 33 Rear Window Defroster lesus 150 Rear Window Features 00000000 150 Rear Wiper Washer isses 151 Recorder Event Data 00000008 59 Recreational Towing 000056 289 Reformulated Gasoline llis 269 Refrigerant iaces e eb b ERE E dos 320 Reminder Seat Belt 0 0 00 eee 43 Remote Keyless Entry Sedan 20 Replacement Bulbs lille 345 Replacement Keys vezes 2244082045 RE nes 16 Replacement Parts 00000000000 313 Replacement Tires
15. Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading LOAD ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 197 LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 2 minutes After 2 minutes the radio will go to the previous tuner mode MSG or INFO Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press and MSG or INFO button while playing MP3 disc The radio scrolls through the following TAG information Song Title Artist File Name and Folder Name if avail able Press the MSG or INFO button once more to return to elapsed time priority mode Press and hold the MSG or INFO button while in the message display priority mode or elapsed time display priority mode will display the song title for each file RW FF CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the FF side of the button to move forward th
16. The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake i The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys performance under most braking conditions The system ics from acting on the vehicle nor can it increase automatically pumps the brakes during severe braking braking or steering efficiency beyond that af conditions to prevent wheel lock up forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded WARNING The ABS cannot prevent accidents including e Pumping of the ABS will diminish their effective those resulting from excessive speed in turns following another vehicle too closely or hydro ness and may lead to an accident Pumping makes planing Only a safe attentive and skillful driver can prevent accidents The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous Continued manner that could jeopardize the user s safety or the safety of others the stopping distance longer Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to slow down or stop The ABS Telltale Light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System The light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds es If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will con
17. X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes X Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve replace as necessary T Replace the make up air filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 XM lt lt lt gt lt OX Adjust the generator drive belt tension E MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 361 H Miles 39 000 42 000 45 000 48 000 51 000 54 000 Kilometers 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 F Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X N replaced at three months A Rotate tires X X X 2 Inspect the brake linings X E Change the brake fluid If vehicle is used for X S trailer towing C Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace as X H necessary F Change the manual transaxle fluid t X U Inspect the make up air filter replace as neces X sary S 8 362 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Miles 57 000 60 000 63 000 66 000 69 000 72 000 Kilometers 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X X placed at three months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equi
18. and push or pull the seat back forward es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113 WARNING Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions when one or more of the seat latches is not engaged Riding with the seat latches disengaged could result in serious or fatal injury It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat Folding Rear Seat Button belts When returning the seat back to it s upright position make sure that the seat back latch is engaged You should not be able to fold the seat back forward unless the release button is depressed or the emergency release handle is pulled Do not allow passengers to ride in a rear seat if the seat back latch is not engaged Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly 114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M NOTE e If the rear center lap shoulder belt appears to be locked into place check to verify that the seatback is fully latched Tumbling Rear Seat To provide additional storage in the cargo area each rear seat can be tumbled forward CAUTION If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still does not operate properly check and see if the Automati
19. compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing the outside temperature and the current radio station For additional information regarding the compass refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in this section Average Fuel Economy Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset When the fuel economy is reset the display will read RESET or show dashes for two seconds Then the history information will be erased and the averaging will continue from where it was before the reset ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179 Distance To Empty DTE Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank This estimated distance is determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous and average fuel economy according to the current fuel tank level This is not resettable NOTE Significant changes in driving style or vehicle loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of the vehicle regardless of the DTE displayed value When the DTE value is less than 30 miles estimated driving distance the DTE display will change to a text display of LOW FUEL This display will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel Adding a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the LOW FUEL text and a new DTE value will be displayed based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level Elapsed Time Shows the tot
20. for storing up to six compact discs CDs and other The console has two front cupholders a removable coin miscellaneous items holder 12 Volt power outlet and a front storage tray There are three additional cupholders one is molded in the center of the console to hold large cups and the others are in the rear of the console to serve passengers in the rear seat The floor console power outlet will also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit if equipped with an optional Smoker s Package CAUTION e Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Sliding Armrest Storage Bins Storage Pockets There are storage pockets located on each door trim panel Continued ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145 CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery REAR SHELF PANEL IF EQUIPP
21. system The UConnect system allows up to seven cellular phones to be linked to the system Only one linked or paired cellular phone can be used with the system at a time The system is available in English Spanish or French languages Phone Button The rearview mirror contains the microphone Jt for the system depending on the type of mirror and radio equipped and either the radio or the mirror has the two control buttons PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button that will enable you to access the system Voice Recognition Button Actual button location may vary with radio e The individual buttons are described in the Operation section The UConnect system can be used with any Hands Free Profile certified Bluetooth cellular phone See the UConnect website for supported phones If your cellu lar phone supports a different profile e g Headset Profile you may not be able to use any UConnect features Refer to your cellular service provider or the phone manufacturer for details The UConnect system is fully integrated with the vehi cle s audio system The volume of the UConnect system can be adjusted either from the radio volume control knob or from the steering wheel radio control right switch if so equipped 82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se The radio display will be used for visual prompts from the UConnect system such as CELL or caller ID on certain radios Operation V
22. 1 Enter the vehicle and close the door Sit back and adjust the seat 2 The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front seat next to your arm Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap WARNING A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together 38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING A belt that is worn under your arm is very danger ous Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision increasing head and neck injury A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries Ribs aren t as strong as shoulder bones Wear the belt over your shoulder so that your stron gest bones will take the force in a collision A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision You are more likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not Latch Plate wear your shoulder belt The lap and shoulder belt 3 When the belt is long enough to fit insert the latch are meant to be used together plate into the buckle until you hear a click ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39 Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Removing Slack From Belt 4 Positi
23. 3 Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary t X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 368 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty t This maintenance is not required if previously replaced t This maintenance is required only for police taxi limousine type operation or trailer towing This maintenance is required only for police taxi limousine type operation or trailer towing Inspection and service should also be performed anytime a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all receipts EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 369 Maintenance Schedule A Non Turbocharged Miles 6 000 12 000 18 000 24 000 30 000 36 000 Kilometers 10 000 20 000 30 000 40 000 50 000 60 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped X with four wheel disc brakes Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Replace the make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 x lt lt lt gt lt gt lt M
24. 3 Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 15 seconds After 10 seconds a chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the second key 18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se 4 Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60 seconds After 10 seconds a single chime will sound In addition the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing To indicate that programming is complete the indicator light will turn on again for three seconds and then turn off The new Sentry Key has been programmed The Re mote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure Repeat this proce dure to program up to a total of eight keys If you do not have a programmed Sentry Key contact your autho rized dealer for details NOTE Ifa programmed key is lost see your authorized dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the sys tems memory This will prevent the lost key from starting your vehicle The remaining keys must then be repro grammed All vehicle keys must be taken to the autho rized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed General Information The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules Part 15 and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following
25. 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Main tenance Schedule in Section 8 for transmission fluid change intervals 288 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE Check the automatic transmission fluid level before towing Towing Tips Electronic Speed Control If Equipped e Don t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads e When using the speed control if you experience speed drops greater than 10 mph 16 km h disengage until you can get back to cruising speed e Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to maximize fuel efficiency Towing Tips Cooling System To reduce potential for engine and transmission over heating take the following actions e City Driving When stopped for short periods of time put transmission in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed e Highway Driving Reduce speed e Air Conditioning Turn off temporarily ee STARTING AND OPERATING 289 RECREATIONAL TOWING BEHIND MOTORHOME ETC Towing Manual Transaxle If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle it may be towed with all four wheels on the ground in a forward direction at any legal highway speed for any distance if the transaxle is in NEUTRAL Towing Automatic Transaxle CAUTION Recreational towing on vehicle s equipped with au tomatic transaxle s is not recommended NOTE If the vehicle requires towing make sure all four wheels are off the ground WHAT TO
26. A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 370 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME not done at 102 000 miles 200 000 km Miles 42 000 48 000 54 000 60 000 66 000 Kilometers 70 000 80 000 90 000 100 000 110 000 Months 42 48 54 60 66 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with X four wheel disc brakes Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve replace if necessar X Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if X Replace the make up air filter x Adjust the generator drive belt tension x lt ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 371 Miles 72 000 78 000 84 000 90 000 96 000 102 000 Kilometers 120 000 130 000 140 000 150 000 160 000 170 000 Months 72 78 84 90 96 102 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X X Dein saints E Ha vehicles equipped with X Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Replace the engine timing belt Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Inspect the PCV valve replace if necessary not required if previously changed
27. Center position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror position Power Mirror Switch Illuminated Vanity Mirrors If Equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with an illuminated vanity mirror located on the sun visor To use the mirror es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79 rotate the sun visor down and swing the mirror cover e The passenger vanity mirror will become inoperable if upward The lights turn on automatically Closing the left on for more than 10 minutes Vind dba md the lights Sun Visor Sliding Feature The sun visors are designed to slide outward along the support shaft to provide extended coverage of the wind om shield and door glass 1 Rotate the sun visor downward 2 Pull the visor forward to remove if from the swivel clip 3 Slide the visor outwards along the shaft to the desired position To store the sun visor to its original position reverse the above process Illuminated Vanity Mirror NOTE e The driver vanity mirror will become inoperable when the vehicle alarm is enabled 80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M HANDS FREE COMMUNICATION UConnect IF EQUIPPED NOTE The sales code RER and REU radios contain an integrated Hands Free Communication UConnect system Refer to your Navigation User s Manual for UConnect system operating instructions for these ra dios Radio sales code can be located on the lower right corner of the Radio facepla
28. DO IN EMERGENCIES CONTENTS Bl Hazard Warning Flashers 292 H If Your Engine Overheats 292 H Jacking And Tire Changing 294 Jack Location 000000 taana 295 Spare Tire Stowage rt pasus 295 Spare Tire Removal 00 296 Preparations For Jacking 296 Jacking Instructions 000 297 Bl jump Starting Procedures H Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ll Towing A Disabled Vehicle Towing With The Key In Ignition 304 Towing Without The Key In Ignition 305 2902 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS The Hazard Warning Flasher switch is located on the instrument panel below the radio 022605959 Hazard Warning Flasher Switch Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers When the Hazard Warning Flasher switch is activated all directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency Press the switch a sec ond time to turn off flashers Do not use this emergency warning system when the vehicle is in motion Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service the Hazard Warning Flasher will continue to operate with the ignition key removed and the vehicle locked NOTE W
29. Entertainment Sys tem VES if equipped SEEK Button Radio Mode Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped mode Press the right side of the button to seek up and the left side to seek down The radio will remain tuned to the new station until you make another selec tion Holding the button will bypass stations without stopping until you release it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187 will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for 5 seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time MSG or INFO Button Radio Mode Press the MSG or INFO button for an RBDS station one with call letters displayed The radio will return a Radio Text message broadcast from an FM station FM mode only Time Button Press the time button and the time of day will be di
30. Exhaust Gas of this manual The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control device Under normal operating conditions the catalytic con verter will not require maintenance However it is im portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst damage es MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 323 CAUTION Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition In the event of engine malfunction particularly involv ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor mance have your vehicle serviced promptly Contin ued operation of your vehicle with a severe malfunction could cause the converter to overheat resulting in possible damage to the converter and the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over materials that can burn Such materials might be grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust system Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning engine operation a scorching odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst overheating If this occ
31. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully closed with both latches engaged WARNING If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision You could have a collision Be sure all hood latches are fully latched before driving LIGHTS Map Reading Lights These lights are mounted between the sun visors above the rearview mirror Each light is turned on by pressing the button Press the button a second time to turn the light off The lights also come on when a door is opened or the dimmer control is turned fully upward past the second detent ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121 Map Reading Lights 815d4389 NOTE The lights will remain on until the switch is pressed a second time so be sure they have been turned off before leaving the vehicle These lights will automati cally shut off 10 minutes after the ignition is OFF Further use of the lights without starting the vehicle will pro vide 90 seconds of activity prior to automatic shut off Headlights The headlight multifunction lever controls the operation of the headlights parking lights turn signals headlight beam selection instrument panel light dimming interior lights the passing lights and fog lights The lever is located on the left side of the steering column 122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Parking and Instrument Panel Lights Turn the end of th
32. See a 17 Brake Watr ng e px Re Rs Key Replacement 52s REIR 16 Center Mounted Stop 000 Key Sentry Immobilizer 0 15 Daytime Running 0 000000 Key In Reminder iss eces ris RR bea Rr 14 Engine Temperature Warning Keyless Entry System Sedan 20 LOB Deocasuessicesddegbsoes RN Keys uscire a Rd ate tt eer UP 12 Front Replacement lille High Beam Indicator 200 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 00 00 0000 36 Lights On Reminder sus Latches Low Puel tc cie Vitec 2 iat te e ed oe epe Hod zucca ars eR 119 Malfunction Indicator Check Engine Lead Free Gasoline lllllllelssn 269 Map Reading 0 000 eee eee ee 400 INDEX aaa Oil Pressure verser une EX ee aes 170 Rear Servicing secr crasg eee eee 348 Seat Belt Reminder 00 169 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 170 SOEVICO sr 520b sain CUTE ts a URGERE TE wey d 346 Service Engine Soon Malfunction Indicator 166 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 170 Tire Pressure Monitoring TPMS 163 264 Traction Control sss resa SER A 245 Turn Signal ss ecce gud ane ed hate ane 123 347 Voltage si Goats n greens wipe edd 167 Warning Instrument Cluster Description 162 Loading Vehicle llle 275 277 Capaciies ciapa neg ia scis mue UU dee Aen Peg UR 277 TIPES 23 0 re 250 Locks Child Protection
33. These are all normal characteristics of ABS WARNING The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip ment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio trans mitting equipment This interference can cause pos sible loss of anti lock braking capability Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified dealership professionals All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and type and tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate signals for the computer TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Traction Control System TCS will improve accel eration and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at the driving front wheels by engaging the brake on the wheel that is losing traction When this occurs the TCS indicator lamp located above the instru ment cluster odometer will flash The system operates at speeds below 35 mph 56 km h CER am 022605959 TCS OFF Switch A pushbutton at the center of the instrument panel below the radio turns the Traction Control System ON or OFF STARTING AND OPERATING 245 The system is always in the ON mode unless TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION The TCS OFF switch has been used to turn the system off Tire Markings There is a Anti Lock Brake System malfunction There is a Traction Control System malfunction The system has been automatical
34. WARNING e Do not use a tire wheel size or rating other than that specified for your vehicle Some combinations of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus pension dimensions and performance characteris tics resulting in changes to steering handling and braking of your vehicle This can cause unpredict able handling and stress to steering and suspen sion components You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in tire overloading and failure You could lose control and have an accident Continued 262 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Continued e Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control CAUTION Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may result in false speedometer and odometer read ings TIRE CHAINS Due to limited clearance tire chains are not recom mended CAUTION Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are used SNOW TIRES Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during Winter Standard tires are of the all season type and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M S
35. WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Defroster st The pushbutton is located on the switch bank at the center of the instrument panel below the radio Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster and the optional electric remote control heated mirrors An amber light shows that the defroster is on NOTE The defroster turns off automatically after 10 minutes of operation Each following activation of the defroster will last for five minutes CAUTION To avoid damaging the electrical conductors do not use scrapers sharp instruments or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm water es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151 Rear Wiper Washer Switch If Equipped A switch on the right side of the steering column controls operation of the Rear Wiper Washer function Rotating the center of the switch forward to the on position will activate the wiper Rotating the center of the switch all the way forward will turn on the wash function The wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button is pressed Upon release the wipers will cycle two times before returning to the set position Rear Wiper Switch If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the Park position if power accessory delay is active Power acces sory delay can be cancelled by opening the door if t
36. When leaving the vehicle always remove the key from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle or with access to an unlocked vehicle Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause severe per sonal injuries and death CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all Power Door Lock Switch the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29 Auto Lock If Equipped The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if all of the following conditions are met 1 The Auto Lock feature is enabled 2 The transmission is in gear 3 All doors are closed 4 The throttle is pressed 5 The vehicle speed is above 15 mph 24 km h 6 The doors were not previously locked using the power door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter The Auto Lock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Fea tures in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual for details For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Lock can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 De
37. With Optional Satellite Radio And Hands Free Phone Capability Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operating Instructions CD Mode Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped 206 Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If EQUIPPED sator ERREUR EE ENS 206 H Satellite Radio If Equipped 206 System Activation less 206 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 207 Selecting Satellite Mode In REF And RAQ Radios conre e o ner ye a 207 Selecting a Channel llle 208 Storing And Selecting Pre Set Channels 208 Using The PTY Program Type Button f Equipped o Tessas RR m 208 PTY Button Scan ssa ERR oe walks 209 ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157 PTY Button Seek sy sae cae nee Er RR es 209 W Radio Operation And Cellular Phones 210 Satellite Antenna lees 200 W Climate Controls 000 211 Reception Quality llle 209 Climate Control Operation 211 B CD DVD Maintenance 210 Operating lips ive owe eee Eae 216 158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
38. an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation If low level heating is selected the system automatically turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation NOTE Once a heat setting is selected heat will be felt within two to five minutes 112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaus tion or other physical condition must exercise care when using the seat heater It may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat CAUTION Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion This may cause the seat heater to overheat To avoid heated seat surfaces coming in contact and potential seat over heating always ensure that the seat heater is in the Off position amber lights are on for High or Low and no amber lights for the Off position before placing any of the seats into a folded flat position Folding Rear Seat To provide additional storage area each rear seatback can be folded forward To fold down either seat back push the button that is located on the top of the seat back near the outboard side
39. an overheated engine condi CURT tion As temperatures rise and the gauge ap proaches H this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to pass H the indicator will continuously flash and a continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed to cool If the light turns on while driving safely pull over and stop the vehicle If the A C system is on turn it off Also shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the ve hicle If the temperature reading does not return to 170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL normal turn the engine off immediately and call for service Refer to If Your Engine Overheats in Section 6 for more information 18 Low Fuel Light When the fuel level reaches approximately 2 0 gal 7 8 L this light will turn on and remain on until fuel is added 19 Vehicle Security Light If Equipped This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi o mately 15 seconds when the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed 20 Front Fog Light Indicator If Equipped O This light shows when the front fog lights are ON 21 Anti Lock Brake ABS Light This light monitors the Anti Lock Brake System amp e3 ABS The light will turn on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for as long as four seconds If the ABS light remai
40. and call an authorized deal ership for service 3 Temperature Gauge The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tempera ture Any reading within the normal range indicates that the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tempera ture when driving in hot weather up mountain grades or when towing a trailer It should not be allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163 WARNING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call an authorized dealer ship for service if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself see Section 7 of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cool ing System Pressure Cap paragraph 4 Speedometer The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per hour mph and or kilometers per hour km h 5 Tachometer The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine revolutions per minute rpm x 1000 for each gear range Before reaching the red area ease up on the accelerator to prevent engine damage 6 Shift Lever Indicator This display indicator shows the automatic transmission shift lever selection NOTE You must apply the brakes before shifting from PARK 7 Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light If Equipped Each tire including the spare if prov
41. and or torque converter shudder Using a transmission fluid 7 Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated Then remove dipstick and note the reading a If the fluid is hot the reading should be in the other than that recommended by the manufacturer crosshatched area marked HOT between the upper will result in more frequent fluid and filter two holes in the dipstick changes Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genu b If the fluid is cold the fluid level should be between ine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type the Taare Bolesdn Sata marked COLD Dirt and water in the transaxle can cause serious damage To prevent dirt and water from entering If the fluid level is low add sufficient fluid through the the transaxle after checking or replenishing fluid filler dipstick tube to bring it to the proper level Do not make certain that the dipstick cap is re seated overfill properly 334 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Fluid And Filter Changes Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed as follows Maintenance Schedule A Non Turbocharged Engines No change necessary Maintenance Schedule A Turbocharged Engines No change necessary Maintenance Schedule B All Engines Every 60 000 miles 100 000 km change fluid and filter under the following conditions e Police taxi limousine commercial type operation or trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly f
42. around a motor vehicle Only do service work for which you have the knowledge and the proper equipment If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job take your vehicle to a competent mechanic 314 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES The pages that follow contain the required maintenance services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed maintenance intervals there are other items that should operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance However if a malfunction of these items does occur it could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance These items should be inspected if a malfunction is observed or suspected Engine Oil Checking Oil Level To assure proper engine lubrication the engine oil must be maintained at the correct level Check the oil level at regular intervals such as every fuel stop The best time to check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will give you an incorrect reading Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings Maintain the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the dipstick Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at the MIN mark wi
43. as laptop com puters cell phones and Personal Digital Assistants PDAs anything with a battery away from the compass sensor which is located in the top of the instrument panel These devices can interfere with compass accuracy and performance Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate and the variance has been properly set you may wish to manu ally recalibrate the compass To manually calibrate the compass 1 Start the engine and leave the transmission shift lever in the PARK position ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175 2 Press and hold approximately 10 seconds the Compass Temperature RESET button until the current variance zone number is displayed 3 Release the RESET button then press and hold again approximately 10 seconds until the direction is dis played with the CAL indicator on continuously in the display 4 To complete the compass calibration drive the vehicle in one or more complete 360 degree circles under 5 mph 8 km h in an area free from power lines and large metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Odometer Display When the appropriate conditions exist the following odometer messages will display CRUISE s 6 coon cae Pc Cruise Activated BASCAP ico bebe deje d TES noFUSE These messages can be manually turned off by pressing the right reset button on the instrument cluster Trip Odometer OD
44. automated customer service cen ter menu structure and to leave a number on a pager You can also send stored UConnect phonebook entries as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager entries To use this feature dial the number you wish to call and then press the Voice Recognition button and say Send The system will prompt you to enter the name or number and say the name of the phonebook entry you wish to send The UConnect system will then send the corresponding phone number associated with the phonebook entry as tones over the phone NOTE e You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone network configurations this is normal e Some paging and voice mail systems have system time out settings that are too short and may not allow the use of this feature 96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE ME Barge In Overriding Prompts The Voice Recognition button can be used when you wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice recognition command immediately For example if a prompt is asking Would you like to pair a phone clear a you could press the Voice Recognition button and say Pair a Phone to select that option without having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt Turning Confirmation Prompts On Off Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system from confirming your choices e g the UConnect sys tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it e Pr
45. automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the updated tire pressures The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information ee STARTING AND OPERATING 265 m For example your vehicle may have a recom CAUTION mended cold parked for more than three hours placard pressure of 33 psi 227 kPa If the ambient The TPMS has been optimized for the original temperature is 68 F 20 C and the measured tire equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and pressure is 28 psi 193 kPa a temperature drop to warning have been established for the tire size 20 F 7 C will decrease the tire pressure to approxi equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera mately 24 psi 165 kPa This tire pressure is suffi tion or sensor damage may result when using re ciently low enough to turn ON the TPMS Telltale placement equipment that is not of the same size Light Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pres type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sure to rise to approximately 28 psi 193 kPa but sensor damage Do not use aftermarket tire sealants the TPMS Telltale Light will still be ON In this or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a situation the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF only TPMS as damage to the sensors may result after the tires are inflated to the vehicle s recom mended cold placard pressu
46. can only be edited on the mobile phone The changes are transferred and updated to UConnect on the next phone connection Phonebook Download Single Entry If equipped and supported by your phone UConnect allows the user to download entries from their phone via ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87 Bluetooth To use this feature press the PHONE button and say Phonebook Download The system prompts Ready to accept V card entry via Bluetooth The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth Object Exchange Profile OBEX Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to send these entries from your phone NOTE e The phone handset must support Bluetooth OBEX transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature e Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they are already connected to any system via Bluetooth and you may see a message on the phone display that the Bluetooth link is busy In this case the user must first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth connection to the UConnect system and then send the address book entry via Bluetooth Please see your phone Owner s Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the Bluetooth connection e If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters it will only use the first 24 characters Edit UConnect Phonebook Entries NOTE e Editing names in the phonebook is recommended w
47. center instrument panel below the radio NOTE The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains R 134a a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer in the upper atmosphere The controls are as follows Fan Control 81ca72d2 Use the Fan control to regulate the amount of air forced through the system in any mode you select The fan speed increases as you move the control to the right from the OFF position mm NOTE For vehicles equipped with Remote Start the climate controls will not function during Remote Start operation if the fan control is left in the O Off position 212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Mode Control Air Direction The Mode control allows you to choose from several patterns of air distribution You can select either a primary mode as identified by the symbols or a blend of two of these modes The closer the con trol is to a particular mode the 81caad23 more air distribution you receive from that mode Panel Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument panel These outlets can be adjusted to direct airflow Bi Level Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets NOTE There is a difference in temperature between the upper and lower outlets for added comfort The warmer air goes to the floor outlets This feature gives improved comfort during sunny but cool conditions Floor Air is directed through the floor outlets and side window demis
48. designation on the tire sidewall If you need snow tires select tires equivalent in size and type to the original equipment tires Use snow tires only in sets of four failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what was originally equipped with your vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph 120 km h TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at different loads and perform different steering driving and braking functions For these reasons they wear at unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear pat terns These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type tires Rotation will increase tread life help to maintain mud snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a smooth quiet ride STARTING AND OPERATING 263 EV ES c Ec MES a 055703771 Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your type of driving found in the Maintenance Schedules section of this manual More frequent rotation is permis sible if desired The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per formed 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS e The TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure b
49. dssdo soto bed REA teary thaws 144 Contract Service eosin oe eee ead Pe TY 385 Cool Down Turbo 0 0 00 eee eee 224 Coolant Antifreeze 000 350 351 Coolant Pressure Cap Radiator Cap 327 Cooling SYStEM s ecce ede eda de Rees 324 Adding Coolant Antifreeze 0 326 Coolant Level 2 0 0 0 0 0 00 eee 324 328 Disposal of Used Coolant 0 328 Drain Flush and Refill 0 325 Inspection use ke as PMR iege 328 Points to Remember 000 05 328 Pressure Cap iua opn inaa ee end 327 Radiator Cap 1 ee eee 327 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 325 Corrosion Protection leeren 335 Cruise Light 2 2 6 4 ees m Rn 166 en INDEX 395 C pholdefs 09m Fg qe EE p te gea 144 Customer Assistance llle 383 Data Recorder Event 0 0000000008 59 Dealer Services 21 2 sant be eee RR atin 313 Defroster Rear Window 150 Defroster Windshield LL 71 212 Delay Intermittent Wipers 127 Diagnostic System Onboard 311 Dimmer Switch Headlight 124 Dipsticks Automatic Transaxle 004 332 Power Steering co do eee s 238 Disposal Antifreeze Engine Coolant 328 Engine Qil speer Feu Ha pee PRS OR OAS PBS 317 Door Eocks 22e Rer er ea ww BS we 27 Door Locks Automatic 0000008 29 Door Opener Garage
50. e low to medium vehicle speed low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather conditions and e operation from the driver s seat e Performance such as audio clarity echo and loudness to a large degree rely on the phone and network and not the UConnect system e Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by lowering the in vehicle audio volume e In a convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Bluetooth Communication Link Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to the UConnect system When this happens the connec tion can generally be re established by switching the phone off on Your cell phone is recommended to remain in Bluetooth ON mode Power Up After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON or ACC position or after a language change you must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system 102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Main Menu Redial Towing Assistance Last See Number Phonebook See Setup on Phone Flowchart Flowchart is redialed Francais UConnect Tutorial Number The 32 name language associated Number specific phonebook will be with entry is Dialed used The phones paired is dialed are available across all languages Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 81c6bf7b UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR
51. ek x dew eR 94 Auto Down Power Windows 32 Automatic Door Locks 200000 29 Automatic Transaxle 12 222 227 332 Adding Fluid pe cesas eue ead Pei a 332 Puer sic aseva eta pba qu e ex PII Re 334 Fluid and Filter Changes 334 Fluid Level Check 000005 332 Interlock System llle 15232 Reset Mode 0 cece eee eee 228 NENNEN INDEX 393 Special Additives 20 0 seco is 334 Autostick sas 308s ede ha e REG RREES TOS 232 Back Up Lights 452225 ERR 348 Battery uius ba eos grace doa X a ee SY 318 Keyless Transmitter Replacement RKE 26 Body Mechanism Lubrication 320 B Pillar Location 22i rne terena Ban een eek 250 Brake Parking i432 eee Rune ERROR es 239 Brake System uses et desea e ded akes 241 330 Anti Lock ABS 0 00 000 ee eee 242 Fluid Gheek 3222 siue A de bak gad ad ves 330 Master Cylinder csse ease 330 Parking osere eae ees Cae eG Ge Pee Rea es E 239 Warning Light llle 167 Brakes 224g enr RR EE a e deed 241 330 Brake Transmission Interlock 231 Break In Recommendations New Vehicle 69 Bulb Replacement oramg ei 345 346 Bulbs Light ss ssi e Rey x RAS 345 Calibration Compass 0 174 182 183 Capacities Antifreeze Engine Coolant 350 Capacities Fluid ss iesse eke be hae oe RR 350 Caps Filler ULC o cues ds ei eat RE Du ales EN 27
52. except for the letters LT that are molded into the sidewall preced ing the size designation Example LT235 85R16 Temporary spare tires are high pressure compact spares designed for temporary emergency use only Tires designed to this standard have the letter T molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example T145 80D18 103M High flotation tire sizing is based on U S design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall Example 31x10 5 R15 LT ee STARTING AND OPERATING 247 Tire Sizing Chart EXAMPLE Size Designation P Passenger Car tire size based on U S design standards blank Passenger Car tire based on European design standards LT Light Truck tire based on U S design standards T Temporary spare tire 31 Overall diameter in inches in 215 Section width in millimeters mm 65 Aspect ratio in percent 76 Ratio of section height to section width of tire 10 5 Section width in inches in R Construction code R means radial construction D means diagonal or bias construction 15 Rim diameter in inches in 248 STARTING AND OPERATING ME EXAMPLE Service Description 95 Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under cert
53. feature allows the shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under normal conditions But in a collision the belt will lock and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out WARNING e It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outside of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seri ously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous Seat belts are designed to go around the large bones of your body These are the strongest parts of your body and can best take the forces of a collision Continued ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37 WARNING Continued e Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your injuries in a collision much worse You might suffer internal injuries or you could even slide out of part of the belt Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep your pas sengers safe too Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt People belted together can crash into one another in an accident hurting one another badly Never use a lap shoulder belt or lap belt for more than one person no matter what their size Lap Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
54. gate operator security system entry door lock home office lighting etc The handheld transmitter of the device may also be used at any time Reprogramming a Single Homelink Button To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained follow these steps 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Do not release the button 3 Without releasing the button proceed with Program ming Homelink Step 2 and follow all remaining steps es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137 Gate Operator Canadian Programming Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig nals to time out or quit after several seconds of trans mission which may not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the signal during programming Similar to this Canadian law some U S gate operators are designed to time out in the same manner It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent possible overheating of the garage door or gate motor If you are having difficulties programming a garage door opener or a gate operator replace Programming HomeLink Step 3 with the following 3 Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button while you press and release every two seconds cycle your handheld transmitter until HomeLink has successfully accepted the frequency signal The indicator
55. its edge avoid touching the surface 2 If the disc is stained clean the surface with a soft cloth wiping from center to edge 3 Do not apply paper or tape to the disc avoid scratch ing the disc 4 Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner cleaners or antistatic sprays 5 Store the disc in its case after playing 6 Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight 7 Do not store the disc where temperatures may become too high NOTE If you experience difficulty in playing a particu lar disc it may be damaged i e scratched reflective coating removed a hair moisture or dew on the disc oversized or have theft protection encoding Try a known good disc before considering disc player service RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES Under certain conditions the cellular phone being ON in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your radio This condition may be lessened or eliminated by relocating the cellular phone antenna This condition is not harmful to the radio If your radio performance does not satisfactorily clear by the repositioning of the antenna it is recommended that the radio volume be turned down or off during cellular phone operation ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211 CLIMATE CONTROLS Climate Control Operation The Climate Control System allows you to balance the temperature amount and direction of air circulating throughout the vehicle The controls are located in the
56. latched position rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat Then lift the seatback to its upright latched position When returning the seat back to it s upright position make sure that the seat latches are engaged You should not be able to fold the seat back forward and or tumble the seat unless the release button is depressed the emergency release handle is pulled and or the tumbling seat release strap is pulled Do not allow passengers to ride in a rear seat if one or more of the seat latches is not engaged WARNING Do not ride in any of the rear seating positions when one or more of the seat latches is not engaged Riding with the seat latches disengaged could result in serious or fatal injury NOTE The tumbling seat tether should be clipped onto the elastic strap provided on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat to its normal position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117 Rear Seat Removal 2 Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo the seat Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward space i 1 Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold down the rear seatback Tumbling Seat Release Strap Folding Rear Seat Button 118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the floor attachments Release Lever Location 4 Using the ha
57. leather upholstery and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth and MOPAR Total Clean Care should be taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid Please do not use polishes oils cleaning fluids solvents deter gents or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather upholstery Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition Many are potentially flammable and if used in closed areas they may cause respiratory harm YES Essentials Fabric Cleaning Procedure If Equipped YES Essentials seats may be cleaned in the following manner e Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting with a clean dry towel e Blot any remaining stain with a clean damp towel e For tough stains apply MOPAR Total Clean or a mild soap solution to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 339 e For grease stains apply MOPAR Multi Purpose Cleaner to a clean damp cloth and remove stain Use a fresh damp towel to remove soap residue e Do not use any solvents or protectants on Yes Essen tials products Cleaning Headlights Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens cleaning procedures must be f
58. message off If the problem continues the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information VEHICLE LOADING As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin istration regulations your vehicle has a certification label affixed to the driver s side door or B Pillar Vehicle Certification Label Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to the driver s door B Pillar The label contains the following information e Name of manufacturer e Month and year of manufacture e Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Type of Vehicle e Month Day and Hour of Manufacture MDH 276 STARTING AND OPERATING EE The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the Vehicle Identification Number VIN Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers and cargo The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR Tire Size The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents the actual tire size on your vehicle Replacement tires must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size Rim Size This is the rim size that is a
59. observed or suspected Retain all receipts M A Miles 144 000 150 000 y Kilometers 240 000 25000 H Months 144 150 N Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X Rotate tires X X c Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes X E Replace the spark plugs X S Adjust the generator belt tension X f Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary t X E Replace the air cleaner filter X 1 L E S 8 374 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Maintenance Schedule A Turbocharged Miles 5 000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 Kilometers 8 000 16 000 24 000 32 000 40 000 48 000 Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with four wheel disc brakes Replace the engine air cleaner filter X X Replace the spark plugs X X X X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Replace the make up air filter M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Adjust the generator drive belt tension ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 375 M A Miles 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 60 000 Kilometers 56 000 64000 72 000 80 000 88 000 96 000 l Months 42 48 54 60 66 72 N Change engine oil and engine oil fi
60. prompt and the following beep say Emergency and the UConnect system will instruct the paired cellular phone to call the emergency num ber This feature is supported in the U S Canada and Mexico NOTE e The emergency number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 911 for the U S and Canada and 060 for Mexico The number dialed may not be applicable with the available cellular service and area If supported this number may be programmable on some systems To do this press Phone button and say Setup followed by Emergency e The UConnect system does slightly lower your chances of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell phone directly 94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Your phone must be turned on and paired to the UConnect system to allow use of this vehicle feature in emergency situations when the cell phone has network coverage and stays paired to the UConnect system Towing Assistance If you need towing assistance e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Towing Assistance NOTE e The Towing Assistance number dialed is based on the country where the vehicle is purchased 1 800 528 2069 for the U S 1 877 213 4525 for Canada 55 14 3454 for Mexico City and 1 800 712 3040 for outside Mexico City in Mexico If supported this number may be programmable on some
61. stop the search NOTE Pressing the SEEK or SCAN button while performing a music type scan will change the channel by one and stop the search Pressing a pre set memory button during a music type scan will call up the memory channel and stop the search PTY Button SEEK When the desired program is obtained press the SEEK button within five seconds The channel will change to the next channel that matches the program type selected Satellite Antenna To ensure optimum reception do not place items on the roof around the rooftop antenna location Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause decreased performance Larger luggage items should be placed as far forward as possible Do not place items directly on or above the antenna The luggage rack if equipped should also not be positioned directly above the antenna Reception Quality Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the following reasons e The vehicle is parked in an underground parking structure or under a physical obstacle e Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the form of short audio mutes e Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can cause intermittent reception Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can cause signal blockage 210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M CD DVD MAINTENANCE To keep a CD DVD in good condition take the following precautions 1 Handle the disc by
62. sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at 34 and press the button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at lt 7 No 5 is necessary If sunny use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at then press the button on If cloudy or dark set the Mode control at Jis necessary COLD DRY CONDITIONS ff In cloudy or dark weather use AUTO mode if equipped set the Mode control at If sunny pr ow set the Mode control at 4 or 54 and for snowy or very cold weather requiring extra heat to the windshield use 3 In most cases turning on the Air Conditioning press the 4 button will clear the fog Adjust WINDOW FOGGING temperature control air direction and blower speed to maintain comfort As it gets colder it may be necessary to direct air onto the windshield If so set the Mode control at 3 or S and c adjust temperature control and blower speed to maintain comfort Higher blower speeds will reduce fogging If equipped with AUTO you must manually press the Defrost button to clear fog Defrost mode is not a feature of the Automatic Temperature Control 819653ed Operating Tips ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217 Window Fogging Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild rainy or humid weather To clear the wi
63. systems To do this press Phone button and say Setup followed by Towing Assistance Paging To learn how to page refer to Working with Automated Systems Paging works properly except for pagers of certain companies which time out a little too soon to work properly with the UConnect system Voice Mail Calling To learn how to access your voice mail refer to Working with Automated Systems en UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95 Working with Automated Systems This method is used in instances where one generally has to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while navigating through an automated telephone system You can use your UConnect system to access a voice mail system or an automated service such as a paging service or automated customer service line Some ser vices require immediate response selection In some instances that may be too quick for use of the UConnect system When calling a number with your UConnect system that normally requires you to enter in a touch tone sequence on your cellular phone keypad you can press the Voice Recognition button and say the sequence you wish to enter followed by the word Send For example if required to enter your PIN followed with a pound 3 7 4 6 you can press the Voice Recognition button and say 3 7 4 6 Send Saying a number or sequence of numbers followed by Send is also to be used for navigating through an
64. the climate control blower switch is set at HIGH speed DO NOT use the RECIRCULATION mode ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside the Vehicle Seat Belts Inspect the belt system periodically checking for cuts frays and loose parts Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do not disassemble or modify the system Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been damaged i e bent retractor torn webbing etc If there is any question regarding belt or retractor condition replace the belt Airbag Warning Light The light should come on and remain on for six to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the LED is not lit during starting have it checked If the light stays on or comes on while driving have the system checked by an authorized dealer Defroster Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the blower control on high speed You should be able to feel the air directed against the windshield Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside the Vehicle Tires Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear patterns Check for stones nails glass or other objects lodged in the tread Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or cracks Check wheel nuts for tightness Check the tires including spare for proper pressure
65. the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speak ers Press the rotary TUNE control again to exit setting tone balance and fade RND PTY Button Program Type Radio Mode Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for 5 seconds If no action is taken during the 5 second time out the PTY icon will turn off Pressing the PTY button or ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189 turning the TUNE rotary knob within 5 seconds will 16 Digit Character allow the program format type to be selected Many radio Program Type Display stations do not currently broadcast PTY information News News Toggle the PTY button to select the following format types Nostalgia Nostalgia Biicham Type 16 Digit Character Oldies Oldies Display Personality Personality No program type or N Public Public one undefined Rhythm and Blues Rhythm_and_Blues Adult Hits Adult_Hits Religious Music Religious_Music Alert Alert Alert Alert Religious Talk Religious_Talk Classical Classical Rock Rock Classic Rock Classic_Rock Soft Soft College College Soft Rock Soft_Rock Country Country Soft Rhythm and Blues Soft R amp B Emergency Test Emergency Test Sports Sports Foreign La
66. the automatic transaxle fluid level e Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug condition Check the coolant level hoses and clamps EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 357 Maintenance Schedule B All Engines e Driving in dusty conditions Follow Maintenance Schedule B All Engines if you usually operate your vehicle under one or more of the following conditions e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 2 km Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every 60 000 miles 100 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an Trailer towing t e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser vice t Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48 000 miles 80 000 km if the vehicle is usually operated under one or more of the conditions marked with an t Off road or desert operation If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E 8 e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling NOTE e If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or three months whichever comes first and follow Maintenance Schedule B All Engines in this section e If ANY of these apply to you then
67. the backside of the liftgate handle WARNING and pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion e Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison ous exhaust gases into your vehicle You and your passengers could be injured by these fumes Keep the liftgate closed when you are operating the vehicle If you are required to drive with the liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and the climate control blower switch is set at HIGH speed DO NOT use the RECIRCULATION mode Gas props support the liftgate in the open position However because the gas pressure drops with tempera ture it may be necessary to assist the props when Liftgate Handle opening the liftgate in cold weather ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Some of the most important safety features in your vehicle are the restraint systems These include Front and rear seat belts for all passengers Front airbags for both the driver and front passenger Pretensioning and load limiting retractors for the front seat belts Knee Impact Blocker panels for front seat occupants Supplemental Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC that span the front and second rows for sedans if equipped Front seat belt retractors that incorporate pretension ers to enhance occupant protection by managing oc cupant energy during an impact event If you will be carrying children too small for adult size seat belts your seat belts or
68. the compass as follows 1 Start the engine and leave the shift lever in the PARK position 2 Press and release the EVIC button several times until the EVIC displays the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Press and release the EVIC button several times until Calibrate Compass Yes is displayed A long longer than two seconds EVIC button press will place the compass in calibration mode 4 The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode and that the vehicle can now be driven to calibrate Press the EVIC button from the Calibrate Compass Yes screen to exit the EVIC Customer Programmable features and return it to its normal oper ating mode 5 Drive the vehicle slowly under 5 mph 8 km h completing one or more circles in an area free from large metal or metallic objects until the CAL indicator turns off The compass will now function normally Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic North and Geographic North In some areas of the country the difference between magnetic and geographic North is great enough to introduce some compass error To ensure compass accuracy the compass variance should be properly set according to the compass variance zone map for the vehicle s current location The compass in your vehicle will now automatically compensate for this difference 184 UNDE
69. the jack do not tighten the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered WARNING To avoid possible personal injury handle the wheel covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp edges NOTE The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the wheel nuts When reinstalling original wheel properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem place the wheel cover onto the wheel then install the wheel nuts 5 Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left 6 Finish tightening the nuts Push down on the wrench while tightening the wheel nuts Alternate nuts until each nut has been tightened twice Correct wheel nut torque is 100 ft Ibs 135 N m If you doubt that you have tightened the nuts correctly have them checked with a torque wrench by your authorized dealer or at a qualified service station EE WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 301 7 Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is free Stow the lug wrench and jack in their designated location Secure all parts using the means provided WARNING A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve hicle Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in the places provided Have the deflated flat tire repaired or replaced immediately 8 Place the deflated flat tire in the cargo area have the tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible 9 Check the tire pressure as soon as possible Correct
70. to the beginning of the current selection or return 192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M to the beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will be displayed Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning OFF the ignition will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the CD currently playing LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for CD Audio Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where LOAD the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player Radio display will show LOADING DISC when the disc is loading and READING DISC when the radio is reading the disc LOAD EJECT Eject Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy removal Radio display will show EJECTING DISC when the disc is being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc Press and hold the LOAD EJECT button for 5 s
71. vehicle is in motion Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Trunk Ajar with a single chime e Headlights On e Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single chime e Key In Ignition e Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out with a single EVIC Functions mn chime Press the EVIC button until one of the following func e RKE Battery Low with a single chime a a on me EIS e Compass Temperature Audio Personal Settings Not Available Vehicle Not In automatic transmission or Vehicle Is In Motion e Average Fuel Economy manual transmission Distance To Empty DTE Left Right Front Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Elapsed Time e Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Left Right Rear Door Ajar one or more with a single chime if speed is above 1 mph Personal Settings 178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EVIC Button To Reset the Display Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the resettable function currently being displayed Reset will only occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed To reset all resettable functions press and release the EVIC button a second time within three seconds of resetting the currently displayed function Reset ALL will be displayed during this three second window Compass Temperature Audio Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
72. 2 114 Rear Folding Sedan 112 Removals 33 04 84002009 RP ear stews eae PS 117 Tumbling Rear Sedan 114 Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Selection of Coolant Antifreeze 325 Sentry Key Immobilizer 15 20 Sentry Key Programming 00 17 Service and Maintenance 0 354 Service Assistance cee ee eee 383 Service Contract 0 ee eee 385 Service Engine Soon Light Malfunction Indicator lessen 166 Service Manuals llle 387 Setting the Clock lille 185 187 201 Settings Personal sss ERR ERE 179 Severe Service llle 357 Shift Speeds Manual Transaxle 226 Shoulder Belts i45 r4 ex RI 36 SIde AIDAS iut eee ad wih aoe a RUD eni das 54 Side Window Demisters Defrosters 218 Signals TUND ex ce SA kee Rao eS Pes 167 Slippery Surfaces Driving On 234 Snow Chains Tire Chains 262 Snow Tires i24ud4ee x exea RO Y Re eadem d 262 Spare Tue lee sese eR E eyes 257 258 295 Speed Control Cruise Control 129 166 Speedometer 0 0 eee ee 163 en INDEX 405 Speedometer and Odometer 159 DIANE xd te duda eas edid iR ORO Rie dg n 222 Automatic Transmission 222 Engine Fails to Start 00 0004 223 Manual Transmission 222 Starting and Opera
73. 3 Oil Engine iios e caw eras 309 310 316 Power 5teerng ci koe nee Se ae 238 Radiator Coolant Pressure 327 Car Washes uu vec uet Ain big eats REIR 336 Carbon Monoxide Warning 272 Caution Exhaust Gas 0 0 0 0000 eee 70 CD Compact Disc Player 185 199 Cellular Phone 0 0 00 cee eee eae 80 210 Center High Mounted Stop Light 349 Chains Tife sesa zv uer eU Ge ea E YES 262 Changing A Flat Tire 0000050 294 Chart Tire Sizing cua esa dd a egapadsnads 247 10 3904 INDEX ee Check Engine Light Malfunction Indicator Light 166 311 Child Restraint 0 0 0 0 000 c eee eee 61 Child Restraint Tether Anchors 65 Child Restraint with Automatic Belts 64 Child Safety Locks 2m 30 Child Seat uu anc 2 BS SR acy Ree t queo eds 67 Clean Air Gasoline llle 269 Cleaning Wheels ocu spes uite X ed ede d Ege Eee s 337 Climate Control llle 211 Clock cii oes Rc erue EP IE 185 187 201 Clut hi iiascaces Reed es ed RE ante re OS 330 Clutch Fluid uad ieidue Rer e yi 330 Coin Holder eee 144 Compact Disc CD Maintenance 210 Compact Spare Tire 1 6 eee ee 257 Compass te Cienega nei Pe S 171 172 174 183 Compass Calibration 174 182 183 Compass Variance icri erasini e a e E A 173 Computer Trip Travel 040 171 Console
74. 5 Bi Fluids And Capacities 00 350 lBl Replacement Bulbs 00 0 345 W Fluids Lubricants And Genuine Parts a B bulb Replacement 25 0264049 ne Een 346 POGUE SOROS BE SARS xem Sears aot CASSIS esa ede y shed OS nts By sind Gd aed ava Manco 352 Headlights 2er onda eer n eh s 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309 ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L 070305700 1 Washer Fluid Reservoir 6 Battery Located under Air Cleaner Box 2 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 7 Automatic Transaxle Dipstick 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 8 Engine Oil Dipstick 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 9 Engine Oil Fill 5 Air Cleaner Filter 10 Coolant Pressure Cap 310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M ENGINE COMPARTMENT 2 4L TURBO 1 070405701 6 Battery 7 Engine Oil Dipstick 8 Power Steering Fluid Reservoir 9 Coolant Pressure Cap 1 Engine Oil Fill 2 Washer Fluid Reservoir 3 Engine Coolant Reservoir 4 Brake Fluid Reservoir 5 Air Cleaner Filter EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard diagnostic system called OBD II This system monitors the performance of the emissions engine and automatic transmission control systems When these systems are operating properly your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy as we
75. Control Rotate this control to choose be tween outside air intake or recir culation of the air inside the ve hicle A lamp will illuminate when you are in recirculate mode Only use the recirculate mode to tem t porarily block out any outside 81ea746b Odors smoke or dust and to cool the interior rapidly upon initial startup in very hot or humid weather NOTE Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur Extended use of this mode is not recommended In cold or damp weather the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For defogging select the Outside Air position NOTE Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor Mix or Defrost modes 216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Tips HOT WEATHER Start the vehicle open the windows and turn the blower control to the high position use AUTO AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IS mode if equipped Set Mode control at 34 or 54 Set Temperature control to full cold and press the 4 button on After the hot air has been expelled close the windows and set the Mode control to the E setting at either 73 or 3 or press the 5 button if equipped Once comfortable choose a mode position and adjust temperature control and blower speed as necessary for comfort s If
76. Control ou Use this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger compartment The blue area of the scale indicates cooler temperatures while the red area indicates warmer temperatures 81caad41 NOTE If your air conditioning performance seems lower than expected check the front of the A C con denser located in front of the radiator for an accumu lation of dirt or insects Clean with a gentle water spray 214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M from behind the radiator and through the condenser Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser reducing air conditioning performance Air Conditioning If Equipped Press the A C button to engage the Air Conditioning A lamp will illuminate when the Air Condi tioning System is engaged 81ca746c NOTE The air conditioning compressor will not engage until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds MAX A C To quickly cool the vehicle interior follow the steps listed below a 81cab384 1 Set the Temperature Control to Max Cool 2 Set the Mode Control to Panel or Bi Level 3 Press the Recirculation button and the A C button 4 Adjust the Fan Control to desired airflow setting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215 NOTE e Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor Mix or Defrost modes e See Circulation Control in this section for proper or extended use of this position Circulation
77. DS LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS Engine Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Engine Coolant MOPAR Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology or equivalent Engine Oil 2 4L 2 4L Turbo En Use API Certified SAE 5W 30 Engine Oil meeting the requirements of gines Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade Engine Oil Filter 2 4L Engine MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 4105409AB or equivalent Engine Oil Filter 2 4L Turbo En MOPAR Engine Oil Filter P N 4781452BB or equivalent gine Spark Plugs 2 4L Engine Champion RE16MC Gap 0 040 in 1 02 mm Spark Plugs 2 4L Turbo Engine Champion RE14MCCS Gap 0 050 in 1 27 mm Fuel Selection 87 Octane 352 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Chassis Component Fluid Lubricant or Genuine Part Automatic Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Manual Transmission MOPAR ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid Brake Master Cylinder Manual MOPAR DOT 3 Brake Fluid SAE J1703 should be used If DOT 3 SAE Transmission Clutch System J1703 brake fluid is not available then DOT 4 is acceptable Use only rec ommended brake fluids Power Steering Reservoir MOPAR Power Steering Fluid 4 or ATF 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES CONTENTS H Emissions C
78. E STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se CAUTION An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended Manual Transaxle If Equipped Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key Locking Doors with a Key You can insert the key with either side up To lock the door turn the key rearward To unlock the door turn the key forward For door lock lubrication refer to Body Lubrication in the Maintenance Procedures section of this manual Key In Ignition Reminder Opening the driver s door when the key is in the ignition sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key NOTE With the driver s door open and the key in the ignition both the power door locks and Remote Keyless Entry RKE will not function STEERING WHEEL LOCK IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering wheel lock This lock prevents steering the vehicle with out the ignition key If the steering wheel is moved no more than one half turn in either direction and the key is not in the ignition switch the steering wheel will lock To Manually Lock the Steering Wheel To manually lock the steering wheel with the engine running turn the steering wheel upside down turn off the engine and remove the key Turn the steering wheel slightly in either direction until
79. EATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a e The system will prompt you to say the number you priority level between 1 and 7 with 1 being the highest want to call priority You can pair up to seven cellular phones to your UConnect system However at any given time only one cellular phone can be in use connected to e The UConnect system will confirm the phone num your UConnect system The priority allows the ber and then dial The number will appear in the UConnect system to know which cellular phone to display of certain radios use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the same time For example if priority 3 and priority 5 phones are present in the vehicle the UConnect e Press the PHONE button to begin system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you make a call You can select to use a lower priority cellular phone at any time refer to Advanced Phone Connectivity in this section e The system will prompt you to say the name of the person you want to call e For example you can say 234 567 8901 Call by Saying a Name e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Call Dial by Saying a Number Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the person you want to call For example e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say you can say John Doe where John Doe is a previ Dial o
80. ED The Rear Shelf Panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo area The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five different positions NOTE The liftgate may be opened or closed with the rear cargo shelf panel in position 1 position 2 position 3 or position 4 WARNING e To avoid tipping lock the shelf securely in all positions e Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open or use the shelf as a seat e Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious or fatal injury 146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Sx Position 1 Top 1 Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into WARNING the top guides and slide forward Press down on the back Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 top In of the shelf panel to lock it into place an accident objects could strike occupants causing ST serious or fatal injury Position 2 Middle Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the middle guides and slide forward Press down on the back of the shelf panel to lock it into place Rear Shelf Panel Position 1 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147 WARNING Do not load objects over 100 Ibs 45 kg in position 2 Rear Shelf Panel Position 2 middle Failure to follow this warning could cause the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury E Position 3 Floor Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the bottom guide
81. Feature The driver s and passenger s front window switches have an Auto Down feature Press the window switch past the detent release and the window will go down automatically Press the switch a second time in either direction to stop the window To open the window part way press the window switch part way and release it when you want the window to stop Bess ae Power Window Switches en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33 Rear Window Switches There are also rear passenger window switches located at the rear of the center console Power Rear Window Switches Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be minimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting LIFTGATE The liftgate can be unlocked by pressing twice on the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter button or by activating the power door lock switches located on the front doors 34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M To open the unlocked liftgate squeeze the liftgate release touch pad located on
82. GVWR If you do parts on your vehicle can break or it can change the way your vehicle handles This could cause you to lose control Also overloading can shorten the life of your vehicle TRAILER TOWING In this section you will find safety tips and information on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do with your vehicle Before towing a trailer carefully re view this information to tow your load as efficiently and safely as possible To maintain warranty coverage follow the requirements and recommendations in this manual concerning ve hicles used for trailer towing Common Towing Definitions The following trailer towing related definitions will assist you in understanding the following information Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle This includes driver passengers cargo and trailer tongue weight The total load must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR 278 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Gross Trailer Weight GTW The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo consumables and equipment permanent or tem porary loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and ready for operation condition The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale The entire weight of the trailer must be supported by the scale Gross Combination Weight Rating GCWR The GCWR is the total permissible weight of y
83. IL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running and that the OBD II system is ready for testing Normally the OBD II system will be ready The OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently serviced recently had a dead battery or a battery replace ment If the OBD II system should be determined not ready for the I M test your vehicle may fail the test Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test which you can use prior to going to the test station To check if your vehicle s OBD II system is ready you must do the following 1 Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch 2 Turn the ignition to the ON position but do not crank or start the engine 3 If you crank or start the engine you will have to start this test over 4 As soon as you turn your key to the ON position you will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check 5 Approximately 15 seconds later one of two things will happen a The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I M station b The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine This means that your vehicle s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I M station If your OBD II system
84. MS sensors 2 Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains materials that may block radio wave signals 268 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 3 Excessive accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings 4 Using tire chains on the vehicle 5 Using wheels tires not equipped with TPMS Sensors NOTE 1 The compact spare tire if equipped does not have a TPMS Sensor Therefore the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire 2 If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a pressure below the low pressure warning limit upon the next ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn ON due to the low tire 3 After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 4 For each subsequent ignition key cycle a chime will sound and the TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid 5 Once you repair or replace the original road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare the TPMS will update automatically and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn OFF as long no tire pressure is below the low pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Gen
85. NCE SCHEDULES 377 H Miles 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Kilometers 152 000 160 000 168 000 176 000 184 000 192 000 i Months 114 120 126 132 138 144 N Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X c Inspect the brake linings X X E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped X S with four wheel disc brakes C Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X D Replace the generator belt X y Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X E Replace the make up air filter X 3 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 378 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN required if previously replaced t Miles 95 000 100 000 105 000 110 000 115 000 120 000 Kilometers 152 000 160 000 168 000 176 000 184 000 192 000 Months 114 120 126 132 138 144 Replace the power steering air conditioner X belt Inspect the PCV valve replace if necessary not X Flush and replace the engine coolant if not X done at 60 months Replace the engine timing belt X EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 379 required if previously replaced t Miles 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Kilometers 200 000 208 000 216 000 224 000 232 000 240 000 Months 150 156 162 168 174 180 Cha
86. O This display shows the distance traveled since the last reset Press and release the right button on the instru ment cluster to switch from odometer to trip A or trip B Press and hold the right button while the odometer trip odometer is displayed to reset Trip A Shows the total distance traveled for trip A since the last reset Fuel Cap Fault Fuse Fault Trip B Shows the total distance traveled for trip B since the last reset 176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER EVIC IF EQUIPPED EVIC Operation CEES BORE DA E 14 FM 101 1 10 816415d1 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass The Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC fea tures a driver interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster The EVIC consists of the following e System Status e Vehicle information warning message displays e Personal Settings customer programmable features e Compass heading e Outside temperature display e Trip computer functions e UConnect hands free communication system dis plays if equipped e Audio mode display When the appropriate conditions exist the EVIC displays the following messages ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177 Turn Signal On with a continuous warning chime e Door s Ajar with a single chime if
87. O ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEMS VES CAPABILITIES NOTE Theradio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate RW FF p gt a LOAD INFO TME 1 SEEK MUTE SCAN 0 a v amp pusuausig 6 DISC MP3 PUSH ON DIR PTY SET 1 2 3 4 5 6 RND c j c JIE JIE 3 81365bb1 RAQ Radio 186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Operating Instructions Radio Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Power Switch Volume Control Rotary Press the ON VOL control to turn the radio ON Press the ON VOL a second time to turn OFF the radio Electronic Volume Control The electronic volume control turns continuously 360 degrees in either direction without stopping Turning the volume control to the right increases the volume and to the left decreases it When the audio system is turned on the sound will be set at the same volume level as last played For your convenience the volume can be turned down but not up when the audio system is off and the ignition is ON Mode Button Radio Mode Press the mode button repeatedly to select between the CD player Satellite Radio or Video
88. OFF appears to make your selection Auto Unlock On Exit When ON is selected all the vehicle s doors will unlock when the driver s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped manual transmissions or the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in PARK or NEUTRAL position automatic transmissions Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Remote Unlock Driver s Door 1st When Driver s Door 1st is selected only the driver s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter UNLOCK button A second press is required to unlock the remaining locked doors When Remote Unlock All Doors is selected all doors will unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK button Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until Driver s Door 1st or All Doors appears to make your selection es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181 Sound Horn On Lock When ON is selected a short horn sound will occur when the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed This feature may be selected with or without the Flash Lights On Lock Unlock feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Flash Lights On Lock When ON is selected the front and rear turn signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the RKE transmitter This feature may be selected with or without the Sound Horn On Loc
89. PT CRUISER 2009 OWNER S MANUAL CHRY VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada the name Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name Chrysler Canada Inc used in substitution therefor DRIVING AND ALCOHOL Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum If you are drinking don t drive Ride with a designated non drinking driver call a cab a friend or use public transportation WARNING Driving after drinking can lead to an accident Your perceptions are less sharp your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking Never drink and then drive This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or op tional on this vehicle This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in design and specifications and or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previ ously manufactured Copyright 2008 Chrysler LLC e SECTION TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 INTRODUCTION
90. RSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se NOTE Magnetic materials such as a laptop computer cell phone and PDAs anything with a battery should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass sensor is located Ui 15 ui 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance Follow this procedure to set the Variance 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON position Leave the shift lever in PARK 2 Press and release the EVIC button several times until you have displayed the Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features menu 3 Press and release the EVIC button until Compass Variance and the current variance zone number displays in the EVIC 4 Press and release the EVIC button to increment the variance zone by one one button press per update until the proper variance zone number is selected according to the map NOTE Zone 8 is the factory default During program ming the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15 to 1 5 Press and release the EVIC button to exit ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185 SETTING THE ANALOG CLOCK To set the analog clock at the top center of the instrument panel press and hold the button until the setting is correct The clock will adjust slowly at first and then more quickly the longer the button is held Setting The Analog Clock SALES CODE RAQ AM FM CD 6 DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO HANDS FREE PHONE AND VIDE
91. The front airbag inflators are de signed to provide different rates of airbag inflation from direction provided by the ORC The ORC may also modify the rate of inflation based on the occupant size provided by the Occupant Classification Module OCM The ORC will not detect rollover The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed above except the steering wheel and column and knee blocker panels If the key is in the OFF position in the ACC position or not in the ignition the airbags are not on and will not inflate e Also the ORC turns on the Airbag Warning Q Light and PAD indicator light in the instru N ment panel for six to eight seconds for a self check when the ignition is first turned on After the self check the Airbag Warning Light will turn off The PAD indicator light will function nor mally Refer to Passenger Airbag Disable PAD In dicator Light in this section If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system it turns on the Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continu ously A single chime will sound if the light comes on again after initial start up 50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Ignoring the Airbag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won t have the airbags to protect you in a collision If the light does not come o
92. VEHICLE CONTENTS Bl Engine Compartment 2 4L 309 B Engine Compartment 2 4L Turbo 310 ll Onboard Diagnostic System OBD II 311 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 311 H Emissions Inspection And Maintenance Progr ms 4 ke ex Ro E AUR 311 Bl Replacement Parts 0000 313 W Dealer Service cue aoi yep 313 a Maintenance Procedures ae cer RR 314 Engine Oil cesa erem emn 314 Engine Air Cleaner Filter 317 Maintenance Free Battery Air Conditioner Maintenance Body Lubrication llle Windshield Wiper Blades Adding Washer Fluid Exhaust System ise o rg pits 322 Cooling System less 324 308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Brake System sco m Res 330 Front Parking Turn Signal And Side Marker Automatic Transaxle s s 332 EIUS ques pde R 347 Manual Transaxle 00004 334 Front Fog Lights H Equipped oec owes a Appearance Care And Protection From ie d LIBUS od Rear Tae olen ighis xe dtee eme e a EAD ae aa Se 348 COIFPOSIOD i aie RH ee 03 E x GE EG RR 335 Bruses 0 0 cee eee ee 341 a A E 348 Integrated Power Module IPM 341 Gatien a Mee Mon sa ee M Vehicle Storage 2 ceeeravceneress 34
93. VEHICLE 103 Voice Tree Phonebook New Entry Enter Name Y at a time Enter Location Enter Location Current Number is played Enter New Number Entry is modified Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined Phonebook Enter Number New Entry Added 81c6bf80 104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Voice Tree Setup loggle New phone Select a language Confirmation will English Espanol Prompts temporarily or Francais on oft override phone priorities All Phones Deleted Note Available Voice commands are shown in bold face and are underlined 030605540 es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105 Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s Zero call one cancel two confirmation prompts three continue four delete five dial six download seven edit eight emergency nine English star erase all plus Espanol pound Francais add location help all home 106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Commands Voice Commands Primary Alternate s Primary Alternate s language return to main menu return or main menu list names select phone select list phones send mobile set up phone settings or phone mute set up mute off towing ass
94. VEHICLE M OCM communicates with the ORC The ORC uses the occupant category to determine whether the front passenger airbag should be turned off It also deter mines the rate of airbag inflation during a collision e Your vehicle has four Weight Sensors located between the seat and the floor pan The weight sensors measure applied weight and transfers that information to the OCM e The seat side mounted Side Airbag Inflatable Cur tains SABIC If Equipped are designed to activate only in certain side collisions The ORC module determines if a side collision is severe enough to require the Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC to inflate The ORC module monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON positions These include all of the items listed under The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC system consists of the following In moderate to severe side collisions the inflating Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC exits down from above the windows into the space between the occupant and the window The Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC moves at a very high speed and with such a high force that it could injure you if you are not seated properly or if items are positioned in the area where the airbag inflates This especially applies to children The following requirements must be strictly adhered to e Do not modify the front passenger seat ass
95. a ioo Rhen RR rx RR EAS 77 Identification Logo llis Rearview sgn i kr x Xe RO ew edere 77 Materials Added to 000005 Vanity x ik packs Gah ae dtr e races dea ac Rr 78 Quality 4 acseas ees eco e hi dede e ane Modifications Alterations Vehicle 7 Recommendation sn Monitor Tire Pressure System 264 Synthetic iia sse dig hk intensa Mopar Part s sed sewer Tu veter ws 313 386 VISCOSILY uode iR ke SE eae Bee a a Oil Filter Selection llle New Vehicle Break In Period 69 Onboard Diagnostic System Opener Garage Door HomeLink Occupant Restraints Sedan 35 Operator Manual Owner s Manual Octane Rating Gasoline Fuel 269 Outside Air Intake 0 402 INDEX aa Overdrive uae da oe ee aS a oe ees at 231 Overheating Engine pessas tre pinea 162 292 Owner s Manual Operator Manual 4 387 Paitit Care us 3 ouo coe Spese NO Rea Rene d 335 PanelRearShelf 1222299 ERR 145 Pame Alarmi paiera es nte e bundy ade aes 23 Parking Brake cs 204 00 be 239 Passing Light 12 os at aa ERES es 125 Personal Settings atu Redde eis Rees 179 PES ias scias t dere ada aa Marka aula ara i EORR 69 Phone Cellular eren 80 Phone Hands Free UConnect 80 Placard Tire and Loading Information 250 Power Doot Locks 2222 9 RR RR crest 28
96. abel certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards We also recommend that you make sure that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle where you will use it before you buy it The restraint must be appropriate for your child s weight and height Check the label on the restraint for weight and height limits Carefully follow the instructions that come with the restraint If you install the restraint improperly it may not work when you need it The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be switched to an automatic locking mode which are designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap shoulder belt will tighten the belt The cinching latch plate will keep the belt tight however any seat belt system will loosen with time so check the belt occasionally and pull it tight if necessary If the seat belt has a switchable retractor please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor ALR in this section In the rear seat you may have trouble tightening the lap shoulder belt on the child restraint because the buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening on the restraint Disconnect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the belt several times to shorten it Insert th
97. ain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions i e tire pressure vehicle loading road conditions and posted speed limits Load Identification blank Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load SL Tire Extra Load XL Extra load or reinforced tire Light Load Light load tire C D E Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire en STARTING AND OPERATING 249 Tire Identification Number TIN The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire however the date code may only be on one side Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including the date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle If the TIN is not found on the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire EXAMPLE DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT Department of Transportation standards and is approved for highway use This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U S Department of Transportati
98. air conditioner off and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range After appropriate action has been taken if the pointer remains on the H turn the engine off immediately and call for service 294 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES ME WARNING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING A hot engine cooling system is dangerous You or WARNING others could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant You may want to call a service center if your vehicle overheats If you decide to look under the hood yourself refer to Section 7 Maintenance of this manual Follow the warnings under the Cooling e Being under a jacked up vehicle is dangerous The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you You could be crushed Never put any part of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack If you need to get under a raised vehicle take it to a service center where it can be raised on a lift The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing tires only The jack should not be used to lift the vehicle for service purposes The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level surface only Avoid ice or slippery areas System Pressure Cap paragraph EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 295 Jack Location Spare Tire Stowage The jack and jack handle are stowed behind the right rear The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the side trim panel in the cargo area vehicle by means of a hook bask
99. al elapsed time of travel since the last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC position Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position Tire Pressure Monitor TPM Refer to Section 5 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS for system operation Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features This allows the driver to set and recall features when the shift lever is in PARK automatic transmission or the vehicle is stopped manual transmission Press and release the EVIC button until Personal Set tings is displayed in the EVIC Use the EVIC button to display one of the following choices 180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se Language When in this display you may select different languages for all display nomenclature including the trip functions Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects English Espanol Deutsch Italiano or Francais depend ing on availability As you continue the displayed infor mation will be shown in the selected language NOTE UConnect language will not change using the EVIC Please refer to Language Selection in the Hands Free Communication UConnect If Equipped section of this manual for details Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH 24 Km h When ON is selected all doors lock automatically when the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph 24 km h Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or
100. al entity 60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se upon request General data that does not identify par ticular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorpo ration in aggregate crash databases such as those main tained by the U S government and various states Data of a potentially sensitive nature such as would identify a particular driver vehicle or crash will be treated confi dentially Confidential data will not be disclosed by Chrysler LLC to any third party except when 1 Used for research purposes such as to match data with a particular crash record in an aggregate database provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter preserved 2 Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC product 3 Requested by police under a legal warrant 4 Otherwise required by law Data parameters that may be recorded e Diagnostic trouble code s and warning light status for electronically controlled safety systems including the airbag system Airbag disable light status if equipped Iime of airbag deployment in terms of ignition cycles and vehicle mileage Airbag deployment level if applicable e Impact acceleration and angle Seatbelt status Brake status service and parking brakes Accelerator status including vehicle speed e Engine control status including engine speed e Transmission gear selection E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61 e Cruise control st
101. ames to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook from which you choose To select one of the entries from the list press the Voice Recognition button while the UConnect system is playing the desired entry and say Delete After you enter the name the UConnect system will ask you which designation you wish to delete home work mobile pager or all Say the designation you wish to delete ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89 e Note that only the phonebook entry in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Delete Erase All UConnect Phonebook Entries e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Erase All e The UConnect system will ask you to verify that you wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook e After confirmation the phonebook entries will be deleted e Note that only the phonebook in the current language is deleted e Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited List All Names in the UConnect Phonebook e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook List Names e The UConnect system will play the names of all the phonebook entries including the downloaded phone book entries if available To call one of the names in the list press the Voice Recognition button durin
102. and durability of engine and fuel system components Gasoline Oxygenate Blends Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy genates such as 10 ethanol MTBE and ETBE Oxygen ates are required in some areas of the country during the 270 STARTING AND OPERATING EE winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in your vehicle CAUTION DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or E85 Ethanol Use of these blends may result in starting and drivability problems and may damage critical fuel system components Problems that result from using methanol gasoline or E85 Ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the manufac turer While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol it does not have the negative effects of Methanol E 85 Usage In Non Flex Fuel Vehicles Non FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline contain ing 10 ethanol E10 Gasoline with higher ethanol content may void the vehicle s warranty If a Non FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E 85 fuel the engine will have some or all of these symptoms e operate in a lean mode e OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on e poor engine performance e poor cold start and cold drivability e increased risk for fuel system component corrosion To fix a Non FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with E 85 perform the following e drain the fuel tank see your authorized dealer e change the engine oil
103. and oil filter e disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the engine controller memory EN STARTING AND OPERATING 271 More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged exposure to E 85 fuel MMT In Gasoline MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num ber Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number without MMT Gasolines blended with MMT have shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emissions system performance in some vehicles The manufacturer recom mends using gasolines without MMT Since the MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump you should ask your gasoline retailer if that gasoline contains MMT It is even more important to look for gasolines without MMT in Canada because MMT can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the United States MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu lated gasolines Materials Added to Fuel All gasoline sold in the United States is required to contain effective detergent additives Use of additional detergents or other additives is not needed under normal conditions and would result in additional cost Therefore you should not have to add anything to the fuel Fuel System Cautions Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle s per formance CAUTION e The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law Using l
104. ank If the engine fails to start within 15 seconds turn the ignition switch to the OFF position wait 10 to 15 seconds then repeat the Normal Starting procedure above WARNING Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a discharged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow the procedure carefully Refer to Section 6 of this manual for jump starting instructions Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F or 29 C To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures use of an externally powered electric engine block heater avail able from your authorized dealer is recommended If The Engine Fails To Start If the engine fails to start after you have followed the Normal Starting procedure it may be flooded Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it there Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds This should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded Leave the ignition key in the ON position release the accelerator pedal and repeat the Normal Starting pro cedure 224 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Never pour fuel or other flamma
105. appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC portion of the in strument cluster This message appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the next gear The UPSHIFT message will display while operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per minute RPM You can move the shift lever in or out of the Autostick mode at any time without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal If you choose the OVERDRIVE mode the transmission will operate automatically shifting be tween the four available gears When you wish to engage Autostick simply move the shift lever to the Autostick position The transmission will remain in the current gear until an upshift or downshift is chosen Move the shift lever back to the OVERDRIVE position to shift out of the Autostick mode General Information e You can start out in 1st 2nd or 3rd gear Shifting into 4th gear can occur only after vehicle speed reaches 15 mph 24 km h The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle speed e The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st gear when coming to a stop e The transmission will automatically upshift from 1st to 2nd gear and from 2nd to 3rd gear when engine speed reaches about 6 300 RPM 234 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Downshifts from 3rd to 2nd gear above 74 mph 119 km h and from 2nd to 1st gear above 41 mph 66 km h will be ignored Starting out in 3rd gear is helpful in snowy
106. ard 3 5 mm stereo audio cable and the user presses and releases the MODE button until AUX appears on the display NOTE The radio will return to the last stored mode if the ignition switch is turned from the OFF LOCK posi tion to the ACC position the radio is turned on and the radio was previously in the AUX mode SEEK Button Auxiliary Mode No function MUTE Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition OFF ON will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function EJECT Button Auxiliary Mode No function PSCAN Button Auxiliary Mode No function TIME Button Auxiliary Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds 206 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M RW FF Auxiliary Mode No function RND SET Button Auxiliary Mode No function Mode Button Auxiliary Mode Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the CD player and Satellite Radio if equipped Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to the Hands Free Phone UConnect section of this Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio secti
107. ased e TPMS will warn you of a low tire pressure if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure warning limit on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure e The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C This means that when the outside temperature decreases the tire pres sure will decrease Tire pressure should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall Refer to the Tires General Information in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle s tires The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure for any reason including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire TPMS will continue to warn you of low tire pressure as long as the condition exists and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended cold placard pressure Once the low tire pressure warning has been illuminated you must increase the tire pres sure to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off The system will
108. ass on vehicles so equipped The antenna cable should be as short as practical and routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible Use only fully shielded coaxial cable Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio SWR Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than normal may require special precautions All installations should be checked for possible interfer ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle s electronic systems SERVICE STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS Chrysler LLC RR 81 026 0944 First Edition Printed in U S A
109. ated by a switch S on the control lever The lever is located on the right side of the steering column Rotate the control to select the desired wiper speed 8194cble Wiper Washer Switch Rotate the control to the second detent for low speed wiper operation or to the third detent for high speed operation Windshield Washers To use the washer pull the control lever toward the steering wheel and hold while spray is desired If the lever is pulled while in the delay range the wiper will operate in low speed for two wipe cycles after the lever is released and then resume the intermittent interval pre viously selected If the lever is pulled while in the off position the wipers will operate for two wipe cycles then turn off Mist Feature Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a passing vehicle As long as the lever is held down the wipers will continue to operate es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127 CAUTION In cold weather always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the park position before turning off the engine If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted Intermittent Wiper System The intermittent feature of this system was designed for use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle Mist Contr
110. ation of bugs leaves etc If dirty clean by gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the face of the condenser ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 325 Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub ber cracking tears cuts and tightness of the connection at the bottle and radiator Inspect the entire system for leaks Cooling System Drain Flush And Refill The system should be drained flushed and refilled at the intervals shown in the Maintenance Schedules in Sec tion 8 of this manual If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or contains a considerable amount of sediment clean and flush with a reliable cooling system cleaner Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals Properly dispose of the old engine coolant antifreeze Selection Of Coolant Use only the manufacturer s recommended engine cool ant antifreeze Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type CAUTION e Mixing of engine coolant antifreeze other than specified HOAT engine coolant antifreeze may result in engine damage and may decrease corro sion protection If a non HOAT engine coolant antifreeze is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency it should be replaced with the specified engine coolant antifreeze as soon as possible Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine coolant antifreeze products Do not use addi ti
111. atus e Traction stability control status e Tire Pressure Monitoring System status Child Restraints Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the time including babies and children Every state in the United States and all Canadian provinces require that small children ride in proper restraint systems This is the law and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it Children 12 years and younger should ride properly buckled up in a rear seat if available According to crash statistics children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front WARNING In a collision an unrestrained child even a tiny baby can become a missile inside the vehicle The force required to hold even an infant on your lap could become so great that you could not hold the child no matter how strong you are The child and others could be badly injured Any child riding in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child s Size Infants and Small Children There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt Always check the child seat owner s manual to ensure you have the correct seat for your child Use the restraint that is correct for your child e Safety experts recommend that children ride rearward facing in the vehicle until they are at least one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs 9 kg Two types of child rest
112. aust Gas Caution 34 70 272 322 Exhaust System sio eee see ee eae ee 322 Fabric Care 4e dea Be BR ae he aS 337 338 Filler Location Fuel 0 000 162 273 Filters AurCleanef se pamere e RS eG RES 317 Automatic Transaxle llle 334 Engine Oll sse ce eI eese 317 351 Flashers 4x ER tru hk ace dre altace 292 Hazard Warning isis mb RE eat 292 Turn Signal ase ete ce etes 167 Flat Tire Stowage scias hex e eem es 301 Flooded Engine Starting 4 223 Fluid Capacities 2 6 sestas eee 350 Fluid Leaks 52i wd ee eee ES 72 Fluid Level Checks Automatic Transaxle 0 00 00 0005 332 Brake 4 22 d bee api RE GP a Ra eos 330 Cooling System lille dasa 324 Power Steering llle 238 Fluids iue hue mE ee Porte oe ees 351 en INDEX 397 Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts 351 Fog Light Service sse 6 eee 347 Fog Lights x we sat ts ee Saha ea eng 123 170 Folding Front Passenger Seat 110 Folding Rear Seat see Rm 112 Folding Rear Seat Sedan iiis 112 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle 005 303 Fuel 2244 5 24 teste a dn dude es 269 351 Adding eb EDI hp ees 273 Additives arvo Rr doped aee ped es 271 Capacity a ee eere dp cg ER RG deae 350 Clean Air 22 46 died O25ae2 bY RAR RUE Res 269 Ethanol 2 2 RR ERE PE e TEE 269 Filler Cap Gas Cap ssssssse 162 273 Filler Door Gas Cap isses 162 Gasolie
113. ble liquid into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle This could result in flash fire causing serious personal injury CAUTION To prevent damage to the starter do not crank the engine for more than 15 seconds at a time Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying again After Starting The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine warms up Turbocharger Cool Down NOTE Letting the engine idle after severe operation allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating temperature Do not increase the idle speed manually The following chart should be used as a guide in deter mining the amount of engine idle time required to sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut down depending upon the type of driving and the amount of cargo TURBOCHARGER COOL DOWN CHART Driving Conditions IdleBefore Shut Down Normal 0 min Aggressive Heavy Load 3 min Trailer Tow 5 min MANUAL TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED 5 Speed Manual Transaxle WARNING You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle unattended without having the parking brake fully applied The parking brake should al ways be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle especially on an incline Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears As you release the clutch pedal lightly depress the accelera tor pedal STARTING AND OPERATING 225 80f7bc4b Shif
114. c Locking retractor ALR system is activated WARNING The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lockout feature to ensure that the seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to an authorized dealer for service Failure to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal injury It is important that the front seats be pulled forward to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact between the rear seat and the front seatback If the front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will make contact during the tumbling motion and cause damage to the rear seat material After the rear seat is tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then be repositioned to the preferred position ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115 1 Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold 2 Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of down the rear seatback the seat Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward Folding Rear Seat Button Tumbling Seat Release Strap 116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 3 Attach the tether located at the base of the seat cushion onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to hold the seat in place Tumbling Seat Tether To return the rear seat to its upright
115. cal connector and replace bulb 348 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Tail Stop Lights and Rear Turn Signal Lights 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace 1 Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and Backup Lights remove ne inotone tom Mie welcle 1 To remove the backup lamp you must take a fiber 2 Twist the bulb socket one quarter turn to remove it stick and slide it along the inboard side of the lamp and from the housing compress a spring clip to allow it to partially pop out to the secondary catch 8197a8cc 80c4f469 EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 349 2 Fully compress the clip to get the lamp to come out Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Pom pietel 1 Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL 3 Remove the socket from the housing cover 4 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace 2 Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching the two side latches 3 Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace 350 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES U S Metric Fuel Approximate 15 Gallons 56 7 Liters Engine Oil with Filter 2 4 Liter 2 4L Turbo Engines SAE 5W 30 API Certified 5 Quarts 4 7 Liters Cooling System 2 4 Liter 2 4L Turbo Engines MOPAR Antifreeze Engine 6 5 Quarts 6 2 Liters Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula ncludes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 351 FLUI
116. cation Number en INTRODUCTION 7 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS ALTERATIONS ie Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or death THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE CONTENTS E A Word About Your Keys Ignition Key Removal Locking Doors With a Key Key In Ignition Reminder i H Steering Wheel Lock If Equipped To Manually Lock The Steering Wheel To Release The Steering Wheel Lock Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock SySLOTD cies ay kae oe dis Maga e eed aR Cases ll Sentry Key If Equipped 15 Sentry Key Immobilizer System 15 lll Vehicle Security Alarm System If Equipped 19 To Set The Alarm sees 19 To Disarm The Alarm sess 20 Security System Manual Override 20 ll Remote Keyless Entry RKE 20 To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate 21 To Lock The Doors And Liftgate 22 10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE ee To Turn Off Flash Lights With Lock 23 Witid B uffeting quoe vx wa RR is seei 33 Panic ASI a s
117. ce contracts If you purchased a manufacturer s service contract you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date If you have any questions about the service contract call the manufacturer s Service Contract National Customer Hot line at 1 800 521 9922 The manufacturer will not stand behind any service contract that is not the manufacturer s service contract It is not responsible for any service contract other than the manufacturer s service contract If you purchased a ser vice contract that is not a manufacturer s service contract and you require service after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires please refer to the contract documents and contact the person listed in those documents We appreciate that you have made a major investment when you purchased the vehicle An authorized dealer has also made a major investment in facilities tools and training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with 9 386 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M the ownership experience You ll be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related concerns WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addi tion certain fluids contained in vehicles and certa
118. ce rara Ek ae Bes ke Vee Se 23 MAG ce vl ees ERR ERES 33 To Program Additional RKE Transmitters 24 Occupant Restraints 20 22 err ms 35 General Information 6 25 Lap Shoulder Belts 0 0 36 RKE Transmitter Battery Service 26 Lap Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting B Doorlodbe 2a 3 a RE eee 27 PIOECOIUE pond ta A ipei Manual Door Locks 0005 27 pee E cid TE NN 42 A A A A m Seat Belt Pretensioners 43 qupped RET 89 Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert 2 4 o6c4 ecole Ry ias 43 B Power Windows us avee sede gia te a paak 31 Seat Belts And Pregnant Won semet 44 Auto Down Featuren llle 32 Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental Rear Window Switches lisse 33 Restraint System SRS Airbag 44 es THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11 Child Restraints ess sua enug aeaa ea eE 61 Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The Transporting Pets lese 69 Vehicle 2k eR RI SR 7 a Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make ll Engine Break In Recommendations 69 Outside The Vehicle Nato Dpsecescesna ede Rer a aa 70 Exhaust Gas Re ERR REX RR Ge 70 12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key code numbers for your vehic
119. channel Press the top of the button to search up and the bottom of the button to search down Holding the TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until the button is released Press and release the SCAN button if equipped to automatically change channels every 7 seconds The radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before moving on to the next channel The word SCAN will appear in the display between each channel change Press the SCAN button a second time to stop the search NOTE Channels that may contain objectionable content can be blocked Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888 539 7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock ing Please have your ESN SID information available Storing and Selecting Pre Set Channels In addition to the 12 AM and 12 FM pre set stations you may also commit 12 satellite stations to push button memory These satellite channel pre set stations will not erase any AM or FM pre set memory stations Follow the memory pre set procedures that apply to your radio Using the PTY Program Type Button if equipped Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your radio ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209 PTY Button SCAN When the desired program type is obtained press the SCAN button within five seconds The radio will play 7 seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next channel of the selected program type Press the SCAN button a second time to
120. ches are the most popular on the market today and they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized trailers Weight Distributing Hitch A weight distributing hitch system works by applying leverage through spring load bars They are typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle s front axle and the trailer axle s When used in accordance with the manufacturer s direc tions it provides for a more level ride offering more consistent steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing safety The addition of a friction hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by traffic and cross winds and contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability Trailer sway control and a weight distributing load equalizing hitch are recommended for heavier tongue weights TW and may be required de pending on Vehicle and Trailer configuration loading to comply with gross axle weight rating GAWR require ments WARNING An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing Hitch system may reduce handling stability braking per formance and could result in an accident Weight Distributing Systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers Consult with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational vehicle dealer for additional information 280 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Trailer Hitch Classification Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of t
121. combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subse quent vehicle start ups as long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the sys tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165 CAUTION The TPMS has been optimized for the original equipment tires and wheels TPMS pressures and warning have been established for the tire size equipped on your vehicle Undesirable system opera tion or sensor damage may result when using re placement equipment that is not of the same size type and or style Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage Do not use tire sealant from a can or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a TPMS as damage to the sensors may result 8 OdometerlTrip Odometer The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven U S federal reg
122. con will illuminate on the radio display If the volume control is ON the unit will switch to CD mode and begin to play The display will show the track number and play time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track one NOTE e On some vehicles you may insert or eject a disc with the radio or ignition switch OFF e If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio OFF the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD player e This radio does not play discs with MP3 tracks SEEK Button CD Mode Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next track on the CD Press the left side of the button to return to the beginning of the current track or return to the beginning of the previous track if the CD is within the first 10 seconds of the current selection MUTE Button CD Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control or turning the ignition OFF ON will also return the sound from the speakers SCAN Button CD Mode Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track To stop the scan function press the button a second time 204 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M EJECT Button CD Mode Press this button and the disc will unload and 4 move to the entrance for easy removal The unit will switch to the last selected mode If you d
123. conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undes ired operation ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the doors liftgate and ignition switch for unauthorized operation If something triggers the alarm the system will signal for about 18 minutes For the first three minutes the horn will sound and the headlights park lights tail lights and the indicator light in the cluster will flash Then the exterior lights will flash for another 15 minutes If the monitored system that triggered the alarm is deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until three minutes of alarm time is reached If the monitored system that triggered the alarm is deactivated after the alarm has been on for three minutes the alarm will shut off immediately To Set the Alarm 1 Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out of the vehicle 2 Lock the door using either the power door lock switch or the Remote Keyless Entry RKE transmitter and close all doors 3 The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash rapidly for 16 seconds This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm system is arming During this period if a door is opened the ignition switch is turned ON or the power door locks are unlocked by eith
124. ctor Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor age system called LATCH which stands for Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren The LATCH system provides for the installation of the child restraint without using the vehicle seat belt All three rear seating positions have lower and tether anchorages that are capable of accommodating LATCH compatible child seats having flexible webbing mounted lower attachments Child seats with fixed lower attachments must be installed in the outboard positions only Regardless of the specific 66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M type of lower attachment NEVER install LATCH compatible child seats such that two seats share a com mon lower anchorage If you are installing LATCH compatible child restraints in adjacent rear seating positions you can use the LATCH anchors or the vehi cle s seat belt for the outboard position but you must use the vehicle s seat belt at the center position If your child restraints are not LATCH compatible you can only in stall the child restraints using the vehicle s seat belts Please refer to Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installation instructions LATCH Anchors Child restraint systems having attachments designed to connect to the lower anchorages are now available Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection to the top tether anchorage have be
125. cupant 1 210 Ibs Occupant 2 180 Ibs Occupant 3 150 lbs TOTAL WEIGHT 540 ibs 540 Ibs 325 lbs 865 Ibs Occupant 1 200 lbs Occupant 2 200 Ibs TOTAL WEIGHT 400 ibs 400 Ibs 465 Ibs Bitaddit 254 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Safety WARNING Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause accidents Under inflation increases tire flexing and can re sult in tire failure Over inflation reduces a tire s ability to cushion Overloading of your tires is dangerous Overloading can cause tire failure affect vehicle handling and increase your stopping distance Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle Never overload them TIRES GENERAL INFORMATION shock Objects on the road and chuckholes can Tire Pressure cause damage that result in tire failure Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect satisfactory operation of your vehicle Three primary vehicle handling and can fail suddenly resulting areas are affected by improper tire pressure Safety in loss of vehicle control Economy and Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob lems You could lose control of your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 255 WARNING Continued e Unequal tire pressures from one side of the ve hicle to the other can cause the vehicle to dri
126. d children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured Do not leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power win dows other controls or move the vehicle Be sure to turn off the engine if you want to rest or sleep in your car Accidents can be caused by inadvertently moving the shift lever or by press ing the accelerator pedal This may cause excessive heat in the exhaust system resulting in overheat ing and vehicle fire which may cause serious or fatal injuries Manual Transaxle If Equipped Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the shift lever into NEUTRAL NOTE The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to the floor Automatic Transaxle If Equipped The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK position before you can start the engine Apply the brakes and depress the shift lever knob button before shifting to any driving gear NOTE You must press the brake pedal before shifting out of PARK Normal Starting Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position ee STARTING AND OPERATING 223 and release when the engine starts If the engine has not started within three seconds slightly depress the accel erator pedal while continuing to cr
127. d leave you stranded Failure to follow these warnings may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you 238 STARTING AND OPERATING ME POWER STEERING The standard power steering system will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability in tight spaces The system will provide mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost If for some reason the power assist is interrupted it will still be possible to steer your vehicle Under these condi tions you will observe a substantial increase in steering effort especially at very low vehicle speeds and during parking maneuvers NOTE Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate that there is a problem with the power steering system Upon initial start up in cold weather the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time This is due to the cold thick fluid in the steering system This noise should be considered normal and it does not in any way damage the steering system WARNING Continued operation with reduced power steering assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others Service should be obtained as soon as possible CAUTION Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid temperature and it should be avoided when possible Damage to the power
128. d to contact eyes skin or cloth ing Don t lean over battery when attaching clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the contami nated area immediately with large quantities of water A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam mable and explosive Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output that exceeds 12 Volts 5 Connect the other cable first to the negative terminal of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of the discharged battery Make sure you have a good contact EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 303 6 If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi lizer turn the ignition switch to the ON position for three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START position 7 Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster battery let the engine idle a few minutes then start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery 8 When removing the jumper cables reverse the se quence exactly Be careful of the moving belts and fan FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con trol turn the system OFF before attempting to rock the vehicle If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud sand or snow it can often be moved by a rocking motion Turn your steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the front wheels Then s
129. dditive Technology HOAT engine coolant antifreeze ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 327 Please note that it is the owner s responsibility to main tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is operated NOTE Mixing engine coolant antifreeze types will decrease the life of the engine coolant antifreeze and will require more frequent coolant changes Cooling System Pressure Cap The cap must be fully tightened to prevent the loss of engine coolant antifreeze and to ensure that engine coolant antifreeze will return to the radiator from the coolant recovery bottle The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces WARNING e The warning words DO NOT OPEN HOT on the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre caution Never add engine coolant antifreeze when the engine is overheated Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool an overheated engine Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system To prevent scalding or injury do not remove the pressure cap while the system is hot or under pressure Do not use a pressure cap other than the one specified for your vehicle Personal injury or en gine damage may result 328 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze is a regulated substance requi
130. de windows when the system is in either the Floor Mix or Defrost mode The air is directed at the area of the windows through which you view the outside mirrors STARTING AND OPERATING CONTENTS H Starting Procedures 0 0 22 W Manual Transaxle If Equipped Manual Transaxle If Equipped 222 5 Speed Manual Transaxle Automatic Transaxle If Equipped 222 W Automatic Transaxle If Equipped Normal Starting 0006 222 Four Speed Automatic Transaxle 228 Extremely Cold Weather Below 20 F Or Brake Transmission Interlock System 231 Ce e EAA T A NE etta 73 MAutoStick If Equipped o oo 232 If The Engine Fails To Start 223 a E 232 i DE e General Information 233 Turbocharger Cool Down 224 220 STARTING AND OPERATING EE H Driving On Slippery Surfaces 234 W Tire Safety Information 245 Accel rati ni s i acere Re OR E 234 Tire Markings iudex uc eor gr bg 245 Traction e vd der rrr gom e 235 Tire Identification Number TIN 249 Bi Driving Through Water i i eo en 235 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure 250 Flowing Rising Water 0 236 W Tires General Infor
131. ded maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes are followed ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 317 Materials Added to Engine Oils The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad dition of any additives other than leak detection dyes to the engine oil Engine oil is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle Used oil and oil filters indiscriminately discarded can present a problem to the environment Contact your authorized dealer service station or governmental agency for advice on how and where they can be safely discarded in your area Engine Oil Filter The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine oil change Engine Oil Filter Selection This engine has a full flow type disposable oil filter Use a filter of this type for replacement The quality of replacement filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine oil filters are high quality oil filters and are recommended Engine Air Cleaner Filter Under normal driving conditions replace the filter at the intervals shown on Maintenance Schedule A If how ever you drive the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions the filter element should be inspected periodically and replaced if necessary at the i
132. dicator light should not be illu x minated when an adult passenger is prop f2 erly seated in the front passenger seat In this case the airbag is ready to be inflated if a collision requiring an airbag occurs For all other occupants the PAD indicator light will be illuminated indicating that the front passenger airbag is turned off and will not inflate NOTE Even though this vehicle is equipped with an occupant classification system children 12 years and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat in an appropriate child restraint see section on Child Restraints 52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an airbag A deploying passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to a child in a rear facing infant seat Passenger Airbag Disable PAD System Front Passenger Indicator Light Airbag Status Adult OFF ON Child ON OFF Grocery Bags Heavy Briefcases and Other Rela tively Light Ob jects ON OFF Empty or Very Small Objects OFF OFF Since the system senses weight some small objects will turn the PAD Indicator Light ON Drivers and adult passengers should verify that the PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult is riding in the front passenger seat If an adult occupant s weight is transferred to another part of the vehicle like the door or
133. duce this possibility the following precautions should be observed 1 Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are slushy 2 Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles 3 Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first become visible 4 Keep the tires properly inflated 5 Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden stop DRIVING THROUGH WATER Driving through water more than a few inches centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle 236 STARTING AND OPERATING ME Flowing Rising Water CAUTION WARNING Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water is flowing and or rising as in storm run off Flowing water can wear away the road or path s e Always check the depth of the standing water before driving through it Never drive through standing water that is deeper than the bottom of the tire rims mounted on the vehicle Determine the condition of the road or the path surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water Furthermore flowing and or rising water can carry your vehicle away swiftly Failure to follow this warning may result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you your passengers and others around you that is under water and if there are any obstacles in the way before driving through the standing water Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving t
134. dy prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing When prompted say List Phones The UConnect system will play the phone names of all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the lowest priority To select or delete a paired phone being announced press the Voice Recogni tion button and say Select or Delete Also see the next two sections for an alternate way to select or delete a paired phone Select Another Cellular Phone This feature allows you to select and start using another phone paired with the UConnect system Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Select Phone and follow the prompts You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then choose the phone that you wish to select The selected phone will be used for the next phone call If the selected phone is not available the UConnect system will return to using the highest priority phone present in or near approximately within 30 ft 9 m the vehicle Delete UConnect Paired Cellular Phones Press the PHONE button to begin After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing At the next prompt say Delete and follow the prompts ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99 e You can also press the Voice Recognition button at any time while the list is being played and then c
135. e Express Open feature To close the sunroof hold the switch in the forward position Again any release of the switch will stop the 140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open condition until the switch is pushed forward again The sunshade can be opened manually It will also open as the sunroof opens The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is open WARNING e Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the ignition switch Occupants particularly unat tended children can become entrapped by the power sunroof while operating the power sunroof switch Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Continued WARNING Continued e In an accident there is a greater risk of being thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof You could also be seriously injured or killed Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured too Do not allow small children to operate the sun roof Never allow fingers or other body parts or any object to project through the sunroof opening Injury may result Wind Buffeting Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the ears Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down or the sunroof if equipped in certain open or partially open positions This is a normal occur rence and can be m
136. e MOPAR Cleaner Wax to remove road film stains and to protect your paint finish Take care never to scratch the paint Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish CAUTION Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such as steel wool or scouring powder which will scratch metal and painted surfaces Special Care e If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive near the ocean hose off the undercarriage at least once a month e It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and open If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint touch them up immediately The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 337 If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or similar cause which destroys the paint and protective coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as pos sible The cost of such repairs is considered the respon sibility of the owner If you carry special cargo such as chemicals fertilizers de icer salt etc be sure that such materials are well packaged and sealed If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads consider mud or stone shields behind each wheel Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as possible Your dealer has touch up paint to match the color of your vehicle Wheel And Wheel Tri
137. e for your protection in a collision While video players on the front seat backs The addi the airbag system is designed to be mainte tional weight may cause the Occupant Classifica nance free if any of the following occur have an autho tion System to be unable to correctly classify the rized dealer service the system immediately right front occupant This could allow the passen ger frontal airbag to inflate when it is not desired The Airbag Warning Light does not come on during the six to eight seconds when the ignition switch is first turned on You need proper knee impact protection in a collision Do not mount or locate any aftermarket equipment on or behind the knee blocker panel e The light remains on after the six to eight second It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the interval airbag system yourself Be sure to tell anyone who works on your vehicle that it has an airbag system e The light comes on and remains on while driving NOTE Perchlorate Material special handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59 Event Data Recorder EDR In the event of an accident your vehicle is designed to record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data param eters see following list in an event data recorder prior to the moment of airbag deployment or near deployment and up to a quarter second of high speed deceleration data durin
138. e latch plate into the buckle with the release button facing out If the belt still can t be tightened or if by pulling and pushing on the restraint loosens the belt disconnect ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65 the latch plate from the buckle turn the latch plate around and insert the latch plate into the buckle again If you still can t make the child restraint secure try a different seating position e Buckle the child into the seat according to the child restraint manufacturer s directions e When your child restraint is not in use secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle Don t leave it loose in the vehicle In a sudden stop or collision it could strike the occupants or seat backs and cause serious personal injury Automatic Locking Retractor ALR To operate the switchable retractor pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to pass it through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into the buckle Then pull on the belt until it is fully extended from the retractor Allow the belt to return into the retractor pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the lap portion about the child restraint Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture NOTE To reset this feature you must let all of the belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been returned back into the retra
139. e market today do not support rejecting an incoming call when another call is in progress Therefore the user can only answer an incoming call or ignore it Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress To make a second call while you are currently on a call press the Voice Recognition button and say Dial or Call followed by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to call The first call will be on hold while the second call is in progress To go back to the first call refer es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91 to Toggling Between Calls in this section To combine two calls refer to Conference Call in this section Place Retrieve a Call From Hold To put a call on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep This indicates that the call is on hold To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Toggling Between Calls If two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls have switched Only one call can be placed on hold at one time Conference Call When two calls are in progress one active and one on hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Three Way Calling To initiate three way calling press the Voice Recogni
140. e multifunction lever to the first detent for parking light operation Turn to the second detent for headlight operation 8194cb03 Headlight Control To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or down 8194cb07 Dimmer Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123 Daytime Running Lights DRL If Equipped The high beam lights will come on as DRL with a lower intensity whenever the ignition is on the engine is running the headlight switch is off the parking brake is off the turn signal is off and the shift lever is in any position except PARK NOTE On this vehicle the DRL will automatically turn off when the turn signal is in operation and automati cally turn back on when the turn signal is not operating Lights On Reminder If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition is turned OFF and key is removed a chime will sound to alert the driver when the driver s door is opened Fog Lights If Equipped O The front fog light switch is on the multifunction lever To activate the front fog lights turn on the parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out the end of the control lever 8194cb0b Fog Lamp Control NOTE The fog lights will only operate with the head lights on low beam Selecting high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights Turn Signal Operation Move the multifunction lev
141. e open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri mental and should be avoided The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a high quality energy conserving type lubricant Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur The recommended viscosity and quality grades are shown under Engine Oil under Maintenance Procedures in section 7 of this manual NON DETERGENT OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE USED 70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN A new engine may consume some oil during its first few thousand miles kilometers of operation This should be considered as a normal part of the break in and not interpreted as an indication of difficulty SAFETY TIPS Exhaust Gas WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can eventually poison you To avoid breathing CO fol low these safety tips Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or out of the area If itis necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine running adjust your heating or cooling controls to force outside air into the vehicle Set the blower at high speed WARNING If you are required to drive with the decklid liftgate open make sure that all windows are closed and
142. e outboard side of the seat p o ERe Lumbar Adjust Handle Folding Seat Control Lever ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111 Adjustable Head Restraints Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in the event of impact from the rear Adjust he height of a head restraint to a position that is appropriate for the height of the person using the seat To raise a head restraint pull up on the head restraint To lower a head restraint push in the button that is part of the head restraint rod guide and push down on the head restraint Heated Seats If Equipped The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion and seatback The driver and front passenger seats are heated The controls for each heater are located near the bottom center of the instrument panel After turning ON the ignition you can choose from High Low or Off heat settings Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use Two indicator lights will illumi nate for high one for low and none for off Press the switch once to select high level heating Press the switch a second time to select low level heating Press the switch a third time to shut Off the heating elements If high level heating is selected the system automatically switches to low level heating and turns one indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation It will turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
143. eaded gasoline can impair engine perfor mance damage the emission control system Continued 272 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION Continued Carbon Monoxide Warnings e An out of tune engine or certain fuel or ignition WARNING malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to f overheat If you notice a pungent burning odor or Carbon monoxide CO in exhaust gases is deadly some light smoke your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service Contact your dealer for service assistance Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon monoxide poisoning e Do not inhale exhaust gases They contain carbon monoxide a colorless and odorless gas which can kill The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as octane enhancers is not recommended Most of these products contain high concentra Never run the engine Iia closed area such as a tions of methanol Fuel system damage or vehicle garage and never sit in a parked vehicle with the performance problems resulting from the use of engine Tunning for an extended period If the vehicle 1S such fuels or additives is not the responsibility of stopped in an open area with the engine running for the manufacturer more than a short period adjust the ventilation system to force fresh outside air into the vehicle NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte systems can resul
144. eam Headlight 9006XS High Beam Headlight 9005XS Front Park Turn Signal Side Marker Lights see ede peo gene Aber vb 4157NAKX Front Fog Lighters ainera eea a 9145 Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Geda 2 ed rh a dade Gane eee EE Center High Mounted Stop Light CHMSL Convertible llis Rear Tail 8top isses eee Rear Tur Signal e enera er re te n Backup Light 3157 P27 7W license Light ss aeg ite alate etae godt Beats es 168 346 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights CAUTION Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your fingers Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb life 1 Remove the headlight access cover splash shield located in the front wheel well opening 80c4f468 2 Disconnect the electrical connector s 3 Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and replace the bulb Front Parking Turn Signal and Side Marker Lights 1 Remove the headlight access cover splash shield located in the front wheel well opening 2 Disconnect the electrical connector 80c4f466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 347 3 Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and replace the bulb Front Fog Lights If Equipped 1 Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash shield to gain access to the fog light 2 Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing 3 Disconnect the electri
145. ear selector lever in the NEUTRAL position If the transaxle is not opera tive the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground All Transaxles CAUTION If the vehicle being towed requires steering the ignition switch must be in the ACC position not in the LOCK position Continued ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 305 CAUTION Continued Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when towing When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck do not attach it to front or rear suspension compo nents Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed wipers defrosters etc the key must be in the ON position not the ACC position Make certain the trans axle remains in NEUTRAL Towing Without The Key In Ignition Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed with the ignition in the LOCK position A dolly should be used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam age to the vehicle Towing Behind Another Vehicle Flat Towing with all four wheels on the ground If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle it may be towed in a forward direction at any legal highway speed for any distance if the transaxle is in NEUTRAL If the ignition key is not available vehicles with auto matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time MAINTAINING YOUR
146. ease it MUTE Button Radio Mode Press the MUTE button to cancel the sound from the speakers MUTE will display Press the MUTE button a second time and the sound from the speakers will return Rotating the volume control turning the radio ON OFF or turning the ignition ON OFF will cancel the MUTE feature NOTE In Hands Free Phone if equipped mode the MUTE button mutes the microphone SCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for the next listenable station in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the next To stop the search press SCAN a second time PSCAN Button Radio Mode Pressing the PSCAN button causes the tuner to scan through preset stations in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies pausing for five seconds at each preset station before continuing to the next To stop the search press PSCAN a second time TIME Button Press the TIME button and the time of day will display for five seconds ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 201 Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the TUNE AUDIO con trol 3 After the hours are adjusted press the TUNE AUDIO control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the TUNE AUDIO control 5 To exit press any button
147. econds and all CDs will be ejected from the radio LOAD If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within 15 seconds it will be reloaded If the CD is not removed ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 193 the radio will continue to play the non removed CD If the CD is removed and there are other CD s in the radio the radio will play the next CD after a 2 minute timeout If the CD is removed and there are no other CD s in the radio the radio will remain in CD mode and display INSERT DISC for 10 seconds If no discs are inserted within 10 seconds NO DISCS LOADED will be dis played On some vehicles a disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF TIME Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button to change the display from a large CD playing time display to a small CD playing time display RW FF CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press and hold FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or another CD button is pressed The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner TUNE Control CD MODE for CD Audio Play Pressing the TUNE control allows the setting of the Tone Fade and Balance See Radio Mode AM FM Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Switches the Radio into the AM or FM Radio mode RND PTY Button Random Play Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random Play This feature plays the selections on
148. ed Assistance in Section 9 of this manual WARNING e Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more severe injuries in a collision The airbags work with your seat belt to restrain you properly In some collisions the airbags won t deploy at all Always wear your seat belts even though you have airbags Continued WARNING Continued e Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument panel during front airbag deployment could cause serious injury Airbags need room to inflate Sit back comfortably extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel Seat airbags also need room to inflate Do not lean against the door Sit upright in the center of the seat The Supplemental Restraint system consists of the fol lowing e Occupant Restraint Controller ORC e Side Remote Acceleration Sensors with Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped e Airbag Warning Light e Driver and Front Passenger Airbag THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49 Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC if equipped Steering Wheel and Column Instrument Panel Driver and Front Passenger Knee Impact Blockers e Front Acceleration Sensors e Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners e Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light How the Airbag System Works e The Occupant Restraint Controller ORC determines if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the airbags to inflate
149. ed with a Turbocharged Engine then change your engine oil at every interval shown on Maintenance Schedule A Turbo in Section 8 of this manual NOTE Under no circumstances should oil change in tervals exceed 6 000 miles 10 000 km or six months whichever comes first 316 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Engine Oil Selection For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions the manufacturer only recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS 6395 American Petroleum Institute API Engine Oil Identification Symbol This symbol means that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute API The manufacturer only recommends API Certified engine oils Engine Oil Viscosity SAE Grade 2 4L and 2 4L Turbo Engines SAE 5W 30 engine oil is recommended for all operating temperatures This engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle fuel economy The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended engine oil viscosity for your engine For information on engine oil filler cap location refer to Engine Compart ment in this section Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num ber should not be used Synthetic Engine Oils You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom mended oil quality requirements are met and the recom men
150. ed with a new vehicle have been programmed to that vehicle s electronics Replacement Keys NOTE Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle Once a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17 CAUTION Always remove Sentry Keys from the vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended At the time of purchase the original owner is provided with a four digit Personal Identification Number PIN This PIN is required for replacement of keys by an authorized dealer Duplication of keys must be per formed at an authorized dealer This procedure consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle electronics A blank key is one which has never been programmed NOTE When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced bring all vehicle keys with you to the authorized dealer Sentry Key Programming If you have two valid Sentry Keys you can program new Sentry Keys to the system by performing the following procedure 1 Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank s to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code 2 Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch Turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three seconds but no longer than 15 seconds Then turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first key
151. eed under inflation or excessive load ing either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure INDEX 392 INDEX M ABS Anti Lock Brake System 242 Adding Engine Coolant Antifreeze 326 Adding Fuel 22x e RR sels eo erhee tt mai 273 Additives Fuel llle 271 Air Cleaner Engine Engine Air Cleaner Filter 317 Air Conditioner Maintenance 319 Air Conditioning Controls 211 Air Conditioning Operating Tips 216 Air Conditioning Refrigerant 319 320 Air Conditioning System 211 319 Air Pressure Tires 0 0 0 0 00 cee ee eee 255 Airbag a Gg ci are idea d ddnde ETT 44 Airbag Deployment llle 55 Airbag Light rev Fx Era 58 71 171 Airbag Maintenance 0 0002 e eee 57 Airbag Side sd etm eR eR RE 54 Alarm Light 2 rens RR 170 Alarm Panie 222 veaee RUP a eae OS 23 Alarm System Security Alarm 19 Alterations Modifications Vehicle 7 Antenna Satellite Radio iles 209 Antifreeze Engine Coolant 325 326 350 351 Capacities iceberg repa Mee E Tese 350 Disposal cee ease ete aa SE RR 328 Anti Lock Brake System ABS 242 Anti Lock Warning Light 170 Anti Theft Security Alarm Theft Alarm 19 Appearance Care iss ces Re dene Ae 335 Assistance TOWING sce uem e
152. eed memory Pressing the ON OFF button or turning off the ignition switch erases the set speed memory To Resume Speed To resume a previously set speed pull the RESUME ACCEL lever up and release Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph 32 km h To Vary The Speed Setting When the Electronic Speed Control is ON speed can be increased by pulling up and holding RESUME ACCEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131 Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 2 mph 3 km h speed increase Each time the lever is tapped speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will increase speed by 6 mph 10 km h etc To decrease speed while Electronic Speed Control is ON pull down and hold SET DECEL Release the lever when the desired speed is reached and the new speed will be set Tapping the SET DECEL lever once will result in a 1 mph 2 km h speed decrease Each time the lever is tapped speed decreases Manual Transaxle Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the Electronic Speed Control A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic Speed Control disengages is normal Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed loss WARNING Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the system can t maintain a constant speed Your vehicle could go too
153. embly or components in any way e Do not use prior or future model year seat covers not designated for the specific model being repaired AI ways use the correct seat cover specified for the vehicle ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55 e Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket seat cover e Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar e At no time should any supplemental restraint system SRS component or SRS related component or fas tener be modified or replaced with any part except those which are approved by Chrysler LLC Mopar WARNING Unapproved modifications or service procedures to the front passenger seat assembly its related compo nents or seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash This could result in death or serious injury to the front seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an acci dent If Airbag Deployment Occurs The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the Occupant Restraint Controller ORC detect a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the driver and front passenger and then immediately deflate NOTE A frontal collision that is not severe enough to need airbag protection will not activate the system This does not mean something is wrong with the airbag system If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags any or all of the following may occur e The nyl
154. ement at this point Life Of Tire The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying factors including but not limited to e Driving style e Tire pressure e Distance driven WARNING Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six years regardless of the remaining tread Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure You could lose control and have an accident resulting in serious injury or death EN STARTING AND OPERATING 261 Keep dismounted tires in a cool dry place with as little exposure to light as possible Protect tires from contact with oil grease and gasoline Replacement Tires The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics They should be inspected regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure The manu facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva lent to the originals in size quality and performance when replacement is needed Refer to the paragraph on Tread Wear Indicators Refer to the Tire and Loading Information placard for the size designation of your tire The service description and load identification will be found on the original equipment tire Failure to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the safety handling and ride of your vehicle We recommend that you contact your original equipment or an autho rized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability
155. en available for some time In fact many child restraint manufacturers will ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67 provide add on tether strap kits for some of their older products Tether anchorage kits are also available for most older vehicles Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years child restraint systems having attachments for those anchor ages will continue to have features for installation in vehicles using the lap or lap shoulder belt They will also have tether straps and you are urged to take advantage of all of the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle NOTE When using the LATCH attaching system to install a child restraint please ensure that all seat belts not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out of reach of children It is recommended that before installing the child restraint buckle the seat belt so the seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of reach If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation instead of tucking the seat belt behind the child restraint route the seat belt through the child restraint belt path and then buckle it This should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and should not be played with and never leave your child unattended in the veh
156. eparator and a 3 character extension Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal CD audio tracks and computer files including MP3 files Discs created with an option such as keep disc open after es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 195 writing are most likely multisession discs The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in longer disc loading times Supported MP3 File Formats The radio will recognize only files with the mp3 exten sion as MP3 files Non MP3 files named with the mp3 extension may cause playback problems The radio is designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will not play the file When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to an MP3 file the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the following table are supported In addition variable bit rates VBR are also supported The majority of MP3 files use a 44 1 KHz sampling rate and a 192 160 128 96 or VBR bit rates MPEG Sampling Fre Specification quency KHz pat vate SRP PS 320 256 224 MPEG 1 Audio 192 160 128 Layer 3 Aoaeiaa 112 96 80 64 56 48 40 32 160 128 144 mm MPEG 2 Audio 24 22 05 16 112 96 80 64 Layer 3 56 48 40 32 24 16 8 ID3 Tag information for artist song title and album title are supported for version 1 ID3 tags ID3 version 2 is not supported by the radios Playlist fil
157. eps you can take to minimize the risk of harm from a deploying airbag 1 Children 12 years old and younger should always ride buckled up in a rear seat WARNING Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to infants in that position 48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M Children who are not big enough to properly wear the vehicle seat belt see section on Child Restraints should be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt positioning booster seats Older children who do not use child restraints or belt positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under their arm You should read the instructions provided with your child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly 2 All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder belts properly 3 The driver and front passenger seats should be moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags room to inflate 4 If your vehicle has supplemental side do not lean against the door airbags will inflate forcefully into the space between you and the door 5 If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be modified to accommodate a disabled person contact the Customer Center Phone numbers are provided under If You Ne
158. er the power door lock switch or the RKE transmitter the system will automatically disarm After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash slowly This shows that the system is fully armed 20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se To Disarm the Alarm Unlock a front door using the RKE transmitter Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry Key will disarm the system A valid key is one that is programmed to that particular vehicle A valid key will disarm the system An invalid key will trigger the alarm Tamper Alert If the horn sounds three times when you unlock a front door using the RKE transmitter the alarm has been activated Check the vehicle for tampering Security System Manual Override The Vehicle Security Alarm system will not arm if you lock the doors using the manual door lock plunger 8160066e Door Lock Plunger REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RKE This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances a minimum of 66 ft 20 m using a hand held RKE trans mitter The RKE transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21 81182d3d Three Button Vehicle Key NOTE The line of transmission must not be blocked with metal objects To Unlock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock only the driver s door or twice to unlock a
159. er up or down and the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show 124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights If either light remains on and does not flash or there is a You can signal a lane change by moving the lever very fast flash rate check for a defective outside light partially up or down without moving beyond the detent bulb If an indicator fails to light when the lever is moved it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is defective High Beam Low Beam Select Switch Push the multifunction lever away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to high beam Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to switch the headlights back to low beam 8194cb0f Turn Signal Control ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125 Flash to Pass You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer ing wheel This will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and remain on until the lever is released mm NOTE If the multifunction lever is held in the Flash to Pass position for more than 15 seconds the high beams will shut off If this occurs wait 30 seconds for the next Flash to Pass operation 8194cb16 High Beam Low Beam and Passing Lights 126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS X The wipers and washers are oper
160. eral Information This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e This device may not cause harmful interference ee STARTING AND OPERATING 269 e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation The tire pressure sensors are regulated under one of the following licenses United States os ceva i KR55120123 Canada io duris eR RR 2671 5120123 FUEL REQUIREMENTS 2 4L And 2 4L Turbo Engines 2 4L standard engines are designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excel 87 lent fuel economy and performance when using high quality unleaded regular 800diab6 casolines having an octane rating of 87 The use of premium gasoline is not recom mended Under normal conditions the use of premium gasoline will not provide a benefit over high quality RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING ReMy2 METHOD unleaded regular gasolines and in some circumstances may result in poorer performance Reformulated Gasoline Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to as Reformulated Gasoline Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are spe cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im prove air quality The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso lines Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro vide excellent performance
161. eration weise ede Dr HE res 227 Overdrive udo dear on RR oh es 231 Transmitter Battery Servic Remote Keyless Entry llle 26 Transmitter Garage Door Opener HomeLink 132 Transmitter Programming Remote Keyless Entry lessen 24 Transporting Pets iios es IRR dina aha 69 Tread Wear Indicators liliis 259 Trip Computer se sicie setarea ER eh RR 172 Trip Odometer 2 2 d seremeciz4beshRe ER 165 Trip Odometer Reset Button 167 Tumbling Rear Seat Sedan 114 Turbo Cool Down isse RI RR 224 Tum Signals 04 isse mn 123 167 UConnect Hands Free Phone 80 Understanding Your Instrument Panel 158 Uniform Tire Quality Grades 389 Universal Transmitter llle 132 Unleaded Gasoline llle 269 Untwisting Procedure Seat Belt 42 Upholstery Care isses ERR ER ee Bae 337 Vanity Mirrors vss Oed Rond a on 78 Variance Compass 6 0 00 cee ee besss 173 Vehicle Certification Label 275 Vehicle Identification Number VIN 6 Vehicle Loading 0040 251 275 277 Vehicle Modifications Alterations 7 Vehicle Storage use erg RE pun red 345 Vehicle Theft Alarm Security Alarm 19 408 INDEX ae Warning Lights Instrument Cluster Description 162 Warnings and Cautions 0 0 6 Warranty Information
162. es are not supported MP3 Pro files are not supported 196 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Playback of MP3 Files When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded the radio checks all files on the medium If the medium contains a lot of folders or files the radio will take more time to start playing the MP3 files Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected by the following e Media CD RW media may take longer to load than CD R media e Medium formats Multisession discs may take longer to load than non multisession discs e Number of files and folders Loading times will increase with more files and folders To increase the speed of disc loading it is recommended to use CD R media and single session discs To create a single session disc enable the Disc at Once option before writing to the disc Operation Instructions CD Mode for MP3 Audio Play SEEK Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the right side of the SEEK button plays the next MP3 File Pressing the left side of the SEEK button plays the beginning of the MP3 file Pressing the button within the first ten seconds plays the previous file LOAD EJECT Button CD Mode for MP3 Play LOAD EJECT Load Press the LOAD EJECT button and the push button with the corresponding number where the CD is being loaded The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and prompt when to INSERT DISC After the radio displays LOAD DISC insert the CD into the player
163. ess the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Confirmations The UConnect system will play the current confirmation prompt status and you will be given the choice to change it Phone and Network Status Indicators If available on the radio and or on a premium display such as the instrument panel cluster and supported by your cell phone the UConnect system will provide notification to inform you of your phone and network status when you are attempting to make a phone call using UConnect The status is given for roaming net work signal strength phone battery strength etc Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone keypad and still use the UConnect system while dial ing via the cell phone keypad the user must exercise caution and take precautionary safety measures By dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth cellular phone the audio will be played through your vehicle s audio system The UConnect system will work the same as if you dial the number using voice recognition ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97 NOTE Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the dial ring to the UConnect system to play it on the vehicle audio system so you will not hear it Under this situation after successfully dialing a number the user may feel that the call did not go through even though the call is in progress Once you
164. et mechanism To re move or stow the compact spare use the jack handle to rotate the spare tire drive nut The nut is located under the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area just inside the liftgate opening ERR Jack Storage Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack Spare Tire Storage 2906 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES M Spare Tire Removal Lift up the cover and fit the jack handle over the drive nut Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the swivel hook from the stowage basket Swing the basket down to remove the compact spare tire CAUTION The hook is designed for use with the jack handle only Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not recommended and can damage the winch Preparations For Jacking 1 Park the vehicle on a firm level surface Avoid ice or slippery areas WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel 2 Set the parking brake 3 Place the shift lever in PARK automatic transaxle or REVERSE manual transaxle 4 Turn OFF the ignition 5 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher ee WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 297 6 Block both the front and rear of the Jacking Instructions wheel diagonally opposite the jacking position For example if changing the right front tire block the left rea
165. ev MASANE TURN SIGNALS Wren am HEATED SEAT ow KEY ACTIVATE UPPER ANDLOWPR HEATED SEAT PORK QUIE AIR OUTLET HGH C LIFTGATE RELEASE ANDUFTGATE DEFROSTAND VENTILATING FAN WINDOW LOCK OPEN 1 OWFR AR UTI FT a E ID e voce suosmcooon TRUNK OCCK ARCONDTENMO CHILD SEAT RECOGNITION ANCHOR BUTTON je LOWER ANCHORS SUDING DOOR EMERGENCY amp oe FOR UCONNECI T RELEASE HANDLE HAL DREN LATCH BUTTON DOOR AJAR CONVERTIBLE CONVERTELE SEE OWNERS TOP DOWN Tor ur MANUAL ISO INTRODUCTION 5 ESP BAS FL ECIRONIC STABILITY ELECTRONIC BRAKE D SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM 2 LAU ial CONTRO AWD O ALL WHEEL FAILURE OF ANTHOCK DRIVE BRAKING SYSTEM 4WD BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM FOUR WHEEL WARNING PARKING ORE RRAKF TOW HAUL WARNING TOW HAUL 4 LOW HAZARD FOUR WHEEL DRIVE LOW 010505550 6 INTRODUCTION EBENEN WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS This Owner s Manual contains WARNINGS against op erating procedures that could result in an accident or bodily injury It also contains CAUTIONS against proce dures that could result in damage to your vehicle If you do not read this entire manual you may miss important information Observe all Warnings and Cautions VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER The Vehicle Identification Number VIN is found on the driver s front corner of the instrument panel visible through the windshield This number also appears on the vehicle registration or title Vehicle Identifi
166. f the weight sensors a fault will occur which turns on both the PAD Indicator Light and the Airbag Warning Light Once the lodged object is removed the fault will be automatically cleared after a short period of time e The Driver and Passenger Airbag Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering wheel and the right side of the instrument panel When the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags Different airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity and occu pant size The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70 ms This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag The passenger s front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle The Occupant Classification Module OCM is lo cated beneath the front passenger seat The OCM classifies the occupant into categories based on the measurements made by the seat weight sensors The 54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR
167. factory engine coolant antifreeze per formance poor gas mileage and increased emissions 330 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Brake System In order to assure brake system performance all brake system components should be inspected periodically Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency Master Cylinder Brake Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately if the Brake System Warning Telltale Light indicates system failure Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when per forming underhood services Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap If necessary add fluid to bring the fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reser voir Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may cause leaking in the system Fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake pads wear Brake fluid level should be checked when pads are replaced However low fluid level may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed NOTE If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle the Brake Fluid Reservoir supp
168. fast for the conditions and you could lose control An accident could be the result Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding icy snow covered or slip pery To Accelerate For Passing Depress the accelerator as you would normally When the pedal is released the vehicle will return to the set speed 132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using Electronic Speed Control on Hills NOTE The Electronic Speed Control system maintains speed up and down hills A slight speed change on moderate hills is normal Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing uphill or descending downhill This downshift to 3rd gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed Control GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED HomeLink replaces up to three remote controls hand held transmitters that operate devices such as garage door openers motorized gates lighting or home security systems The HomeLink unit operates off your vehicle s battery The HomeLink buttons that are located in the headliner or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink channels es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133 WARNING e Your motorized door or gate will open and close while you are training the universal transceive
169. fere and cause false compass readings 040506040 Compass Variance Map To Set the Variance Start the engine and leave the transmission shift lever in the PARK position Press and hold approximately ten seconds the compass temperature RESET button until the current variance zone number is displayed To change 174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME the zone press and release the RESET button to incre ment the variance one step Repeat as necessary until the desired variance is achieved NOTE Zone 8 is the factory default During program ming the Zone Number will wrap around from Zone 15 to 1 Please refer to the Compass Variance Zone Map in the following section Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Automatic Compass Calibration The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminat ing the need to manually calibrate the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until the calibration is complete A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi ronment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Calibrate the compass by driving slowly under 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in a area free from large metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE Keep all magnetic objects such
170. flush and replace the engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Main tenance Schedule B All Engines in this section M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 358 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES Se If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Non Turbocharged engine then change your engine oil at every interval shown on Maintenance Schedule A Non Turbocharged in this section If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Turbocharged engine change your en gine oil at every interval shown on Maintenance Sched ule A Turbocharged in this section EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 359 M i Miles 3 000 6 000 9 000 12 000 15 000 18 000 N Kilometers 5000 10 000 15 000 20 000 25 000 30 000 l Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X N replaced at three months A Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X E Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace as X S necessary C H Iepect the make up air filter replace as neces X E sary D U L E S 8 360 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Miles 21 000 24 000 27 000 30 000 33 000 36 000 Kilometers 35 000 40 000 45 000 50 000 55 000 60 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not X X X X X X replaced at three months Rotate tires
171. ft to the right or left e Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom mended cold tire inflation pressure Economy Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread These abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier tire replacement Under inflation also increases tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride Over inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride Tire Inflation Pressures The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure Information for vehicle loads that are less than the maximum loaded vehicle condition These pressure con ditions will be found in the Supplemental Tire Pressure Information section of this manual The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least once a month Use a good quality pocket type gauge to check tire pressure Do not make a visual judgement when determining proper inflation Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are under inflated 256 STARTING AND OPERATING EE CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap if equipped This will prevent moisture and di
172. g and or after airbag deployment or near deployment EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys or nearly deploys and are otherwise unavailable Specific Vehicle Date Parameters 1 A near deployment event occurs when the airbag sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indica tive of a crash but not severe enough to warrant airbag deployment 2 Under certain circumstances EDR data may not be recorded e g loss of battery power In conjunction with other data gathered during a com plete accident investigation the electronic data may be used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance In addition to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC such investigations may be requested by customers insurance carriers government officials and professional crash researchers such as those associated with universities and with hospital and insurance organizations In the event that an investigation is undertaken by Chrysler LLC regardless of initiative the company or its designated representative will first obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle usually the vehicle owner or lessee before accessing the elec tronic data stored unless ordered to download data by a court with legal jurisdiction i e pursuant to a warrant A copy of the data will be provided to the custodi
173. g and drivability procedures proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools and equipment IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE BEEN Owner s Manuals These Owner s Manuals have been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles Included are starting operating emergency and main tenance procedures as well as specifications capabili ties and safety tips Call toll free at Or 1 800 890 4038 U S 1 800 387 1143 Canada Visit us on the Worldwide Web at www techauthority com EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 389 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES The following tire grading categories were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration The specific grade rating assigned by the tire s manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on your vehicle All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variat
174. g the playing of the desired name and say Call NOTE The user can also exercise Edit or Delete operations at this point e The UConnect system will then prompt you as to the number designation you wish to call e The selected number will be dialed 90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phone Call Features The following features can be accessed through the UConnect system if the feature s are available on your cellular service plan For example if your cellular service plan provides three way calling this feature can be accessed through the UConnect system Check with your cellular service provider for the features that you have Answer or Reject an Incoming Call No Call Currently in Progress When you receive a call on your cellular phone the UConnect system will interrupt the vehicle audio sys tem if on and will ask if you would like to answer the call Press the PHONE button to accept the call To reject the call press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call was rejected Answer or Reject an Incoming Call Call Currently in Progress If a call is currently in progress and you have another incoming call you will hear the same network tones for call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell phone Press the PHONE button to place the current call on hold and answer the incoming call NOTE The UConnect system compatible phones in th
175. handling may ap ply See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate The recommended replacement battery is CR2032 1 If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw remove the screw With the RKE transmitter buttons facing down use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the RKE transmitter apart Make sure not to damage the elastomer seal during removal 7 Separating RKE Transmitter Halves 81182c72 E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27 2 Remove and replace the battery Avoid touching the new battery with your fingers Skin oils may cause battery deterioration If you touch a battery clean it with rubbing alcohol 3 To reassemble the RKE transmitter case snap the two halves together NOTE If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw reinstall and tighten the screw until snug DOOR LOCKS Manual Door Locks Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from inside the vehicle If the plunger is down when the door is closed the door will lock Therefore make sure the key is not inside the vehicle before closing the door 8160066e Door Lock Plunger 28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Power Door Locks A door lock switch is on each front door panel Press e For personal security and safety in the event of an either switch to lock or unlock the doors accident lock the vehicle doors while you drive when you park and when leaving the vehicle
176. he accelerator operation at approximately either 30 mph 40 km h or 35 mph 56 km h depending on the model or engine size The Electronic Speed Control lever is located on the right side of the steering wheel 81bc4c2c Electronic Speed Control Lever To Activate Push the ON OFF button The CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will illuminate To turn the system off push the ON OFF button a second time The CRUISE indicator will turn off The system should be turned off when not in use 130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on when not in use is dangerous You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you want You could lose control and have an accident Always leave the system off when you are not using it To Set At A Desired Speed When the vehicle has reached the desired speed pull down on the lever and release Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed NOTE The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever While in the AutoStick mode Electronic Speed Control will only operate in 3rd and 4th gear To Deactivate A soft tap on the brake pedal pulling the Electronic Speed Control lever toward CANCEL or normal brake or clutch pressure while slowing the vehicle will deacti vate Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set sp
177. he application of any lubricant the parts concerned should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit after lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed Particular EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 321 attention should also be given to hood latching compo nents to insure proper function When performing other underhood services the hood latch release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a year preferably in the Fall and Spring Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder Windshield Wiper Blades Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent This will remove accumulations of salt waxes or road film and help reduce streaking and smearing Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods may cause deterioration of the wiper blades Always use washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from the windshield To avoid dam aging the blades make sure that they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on Keep the blade rubber out of contact with petroleum products such as engine oil gasoline etc Adding Washer Fluid The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rea
178. he engine coolant every 102 000 miles 170 000 km or 60 months whichever comes first and follow Main tenance Schedule B All Engines in this section CAUTION M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 Failure to perform the required maintenance items e Most vehicles are operated under the conditions listed may result in damage to the vehicle for Maintenance Schedule B All Engines At Each Stop for Fuel e Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off Checking the oil level while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level reading Add oil only when the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark e Check the windshield washer solvent and add if required Once a Month e Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage e Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals as required M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 e Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir brake master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed 356 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM e Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct operation e Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for proper fit At Each Oil Change e Change the engine oil filter e Inspect the exhaust system e Inspect the brake hoses e Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo nents e Check
179. he generator drive belt tension x lt Replace the make up air filter X 364 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES BEEN Miles 93 000 96 000 99 000 102 000 105 000 Kilometers 155 000 160 000 165 000 170 000 175 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at three months Rotate tires X X Inspect the brake linings X Change the brake fluid if your vehicle is used for X trailer towing Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as X necessary Change the manual transaxle fluid t X Replace the engine timing belt X Flush and replace the engine coolant if not replaced X at 60 months Inspect the make up air filter replace as necessary X M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 365 Miles 108 000 111 000 114 000 117 000 120 000 Kilometers 180 000 185 000 190 000 195 000 200 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X placed at three months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with Sae dis brakes TUE Replace the engine air cleaner filter Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals Replace the make up air filter gt x lt Replace the generator belt Replace the power steering air conditioning belt
180. hen the vehicle is not in motion Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be deleted or edited Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Edit You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry that you wish to edit 88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se e Next choose the number designation home work mobile or pager that you wish to edit e When prompted recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry that you are editing After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in the phonebook call the number you just edited or return to the main menu Phonebook Edit can be used to add another phone number to a name entry that already exists in the phonebook For example the entry John Doe may have a mobile and a home number but you can add John Doe s work number later using the Phonebook Edit feature Delete UConnect Phonebook Entry NOTE Editing phonebook entries is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook Delete e After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu you will then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish to delete You can either say the name of a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can say List N
181. hicle Security Light will come on for three seconds immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a bulb check Afterwards if the bulb remains on this indicates a problem with the electronics 16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check this indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the vehicle Both of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two seconds of running Keep in mind that an unprogrammed key is also consid ered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle If the Vehicle Security Light comes on during normal vehicle operation when the vehicle has been running for longer than 10 seconds a fault has been detected in the electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible NOTE e The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compat ible with remote starting systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of security protection e Exxon Mobil SpeedPass additional Sentry Keys or any other transponder equipped components on the same keychain will not cause a key related transpon der fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when starting the vehicle Cell phones pagers or other radio frequency controlled electronics will not cause interference with this system All of the keys provid
182. hicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle You will not exceed the tire s load carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions tire size and cold tire inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading Information placard and in the Vehicle Loading section of this manual NOTE Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition gross axle weight ratings GAWRs for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded For further information on GAWRs vehicle loading and trailer towing refer to Vehicle Loading in this section To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on the Tire and Loading Information placard The combined weight of occupants cargo luggage and trailer tongue weight if applicable should never exceed the weight referenced here Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occu pants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas sengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if XXX amount equa
183. hift back and forth between RE VERSE and DRIVE automatic transaxle or REVERSE and 1st gear manual transaxle Usually the least accel erator pedal pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h when you are stuck And don t let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed 304 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE CAUTION Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast may lead to transaxle overheating and failure It can also damage the tires Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph 48 km h TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Towing With The Key In Ignition Four Speed Automatic Transaxle Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi tions The steering column must be unlocked and the gear selector lever must be in NEUTRAL the distance to be towed must not exceed 100 miles 160 km and the towing speed must not exceed 44 mph 72 km h If the transaxle is not operative or if the vehicle is to be towed more than 100 miles 160 km the vehicle must be towed with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to the transaxle Manual Transaxle Your vehicle may be towed in a forward direction with all four wheels on the ground and the g
184. his happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position and will not go to Park 152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M EMERGENCY SEATBACK RELEASE SEDAN WARNING Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 Top or position 2 Middle either by climbing into the liftgate from outside or through the inside of the vehicle Always close the liftgate when your vehicle is unattended Once in the liftgate area young chil dren may not be able to escape even if they entered through the rear seat If trapped in the liftgate children can die from suffocation or heat stroke As a security measure a Seatback Emergency Release lever is built into the left side rear seatback latching mechanism In the event of an individual being locked inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 Top or position 2 Middle the left side rear seatback can be unlatched by pulling down on the glow in the dark lever attached to the left rear seatback latching mechanism Emergency Seatback Release Once unlatched the seatback can be pushed forward to gain access into the interior of the vehicle es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153 NOTE Make sure that the elastic loop is around the emergency release handle at all times If the handle is pulled downward entirely through the elastic loop the handle will not return to its original po
185. holders or any objects on or around the door The inflating side airbag could drive the object into occupants causing serious injury E THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47 Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts Along with seat belts and pretensioners front airbags work with the instrument panel knee impact blockers to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types of collisions The front airbags deploy in moderate to severe frontal collisions If your vehicle is equipped the Side Airbag Inflatable Curtain SABIC on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in moderate to severe side collisions In certain types of collisions both the front seat Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC may be trig gered But even in collisions where the airbags work you need to wear the seat belts to keep you in the right position for the airbags to protect you properly NOTE The passenger front airbag may not deploy even when the driver front airbag has if the Occupant Classi fication System refer to Occupant Classification Module OCM in this section has determined the passenger seat is empty or is occupied by someone that is classified in the child category This could be a child a teenager or even a small adult Here are some simple st
186. hoose the phone you wish to delete Things You Should Know About Your UConnect System UConnect Tutorial To hear a brief tutorial of the system features press the PHONE button and say UConnect Tutorial Voice Training For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog nizing their voice commands or numbers the UConnect system Voice Training feature may be used To enter this training mode follow one of the two following proce dures From outside the UConnect mode e g from radio mode e Press and hold the Voice Recognition button for five seconds until the session begins or e Press the Voice Recognition button and say the Setup Voice Training command Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the UConnect system For best results the Voice Training session should be completed when the vehicle is parked with the engine running all windows closed and the blower fan switched OFF This procedure may be repeated with a new user The system will adapt to the last trained voice only To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default settings enter the Voice Training session via the above procedure and follow the prompts 100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Voice Recognition VR For best performance adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least 1 2 in 1 cm gap between the overhead console if equipped and the mirror Always wait for the beep before spea
187. hrough standing water This will minimize wave Shallow Standing Water effects Although your vehicle is capable of driving through Continued shallow standing water consider the following Caution and Warning before doing so es STARTING AND OPERATING 237 CAUTION Continued WARNING Driving through standing water may cause dam e Driving through standing water limits your vehi age to your vehicle s drivetrain components Al ways inspect your vehicle s fluids i e engine oil transmission transaxle axle etc for signs of con tamination i e fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance after driving through standing water Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated as this may result in further damage Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out and cause serious internal damage to the engine Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty cle s traction capabilities Do not exceed 5 mph 8 km h when driving through standing water Driving through standing water limits your vehi cle s braking capabilities which increases stop ping distances Therefore after driving through standing water drive slowly and lightly press on the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes Getting water inside your vehicle s engine can cause it to lock up and stall out an
188. icle Installing the Child Restraint System We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the manufacturer when installing your child restraint Many but not all restraint systems will be equipped with separate straps on each side with each having a hook or connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the strap Forward facing toddler restraints and some rearward facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting the tension in the strap 68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M In general you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages The tether strap should be routed under the center of the head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the rear of the seatback Then tighten all three straps as you push the child restraint rearward and downward into the seat Tether Strap Mounting Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we have described here Again carefully follow the instruc tions that come with the child restraint system NOTE If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com patible install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts WARNING An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child Use only the anchor position directly behind the child seat to
189. ided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System 164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illumi nates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is
190. in products of component wear contain or emit chemi cals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm WARRANTY INFORMATION U S Vehicles Only See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle MOPAR PARTS Mopar fluids lubricants parts and accessories are available from an authorized dealer They will help keep the vehicle operating at its best REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington D C If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying the manufacturer EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 387 If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your authorized dealer and the manufacturer To contact NHTSA you may either call the Auto Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 or go to http www safercar gov or write to Administra tor NHTSA 400 Seventh Street SW Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov
191. inimized If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open open the front and rear windows ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141 together to minimize the buffeting If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any window Sunroof Maintenance Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean the glass panel ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS The 12 Volt power outlets include tethered caps labeled with a key symbol or battery symbol indicating power source All outlets are protected by a single 20 Amp fuse The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console is a conventional cigar lighter outlet Front Power Outlet It will accept a cigar lighter unit which is part of the optional Smokers Package To preserve the heating ele ment of the cigar lighter unit do not hold the lighter in the heating position As a child safety precaution this outlet is powered by the ignition switch only when the switch is in the ON or ACC position 142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M There is one optional power outlet located in the right IPM may be repositioned to allow power to come from rear cargo area the ignition switch only when in the ON or ACC position NOTE The Rear Power Outlet will not accept a cigar lighter unit as it is intended only for accessory items Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off CAUTION e Many acce
192. instrument panel the weight sensors in the seat may not properly classify the occupant Objects lodged under the seat or between the seat and the center console can prevent the occupant s weight from being measured properly and may result in the occupant being improp erly classified Ensure that the front passenger seatback does not touch anything placed on the second row of seats because this can also affect occupant classification Also if you fold down the seats in the second row check to be sure they don t touch the front passenger seat If the front passenger seat is damaged in any way it should only be serviced by an authorized dealer If the seat is removed or even if the seat attachment bolts are loosened or tightened in any way take the vehicle to an authorized dealer ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53 If there is a fault present in the Airbag system the Airbag Warning Light a red light located in the center of the instrument cluster directly in front of the driver will be turned on This indicates that you should take the vehicle to an authorized dealer The Airbag Warning Light is turned on whenever there is fault that can affect the operation of the airbag system If there is a fault present in the PAD Indicator Light the Airbag Warning Light remains illuminated to show that the passenger airbag is turned off until the fault is cleared If an object is lodged under the seat and interferes with operation o
193. ions in driving habits service practices and differences in road charac teristics and climate Traction Grades The Traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C These grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor mance WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics 390 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M Temperature Grades The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 109 Grades B and A repre sent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded Excessive sp
194. ire pressure check on and to maintain the proper pressure of all the tires on your vehicle The TPMS consists of the following components e Receiver Module e Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors e Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings 5 The TPMS Telltale Light will illuminate in the 4 instrument cluster and a chime will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road tires Should this occur you should stop as soon as possible check the inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle and inflate each tire to the vehicle s recommended cold placard pressure value Once the system receives the updated tire pressures the system will automatically update and the TPMS Telltale Light will turn off The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph 25 km h in order for the TPMS to receive this information Check TPMS Warning The TPMS Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 sec onds and then remain on solid when a system fault is detected The system fault will also sound a chime If the ignition key is cycled this sequence will repeat provid ing the system fault still exists The TPMS Telltale Light will turn off when the fault condition no longer exists A system fault can occur due to any of the following 1 Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies RF as the TP
195. is not ready you should see your authorized dealer or repair facility If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313 you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II system to update A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready Regardless of whether your vehicle s OBD II system is ready or not ready if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I M station The I M station can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine running REPLACEMENT PARTS Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal scheduled maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en sure the designed performance Damage or failures caused by the use of non MOPAR parts for maintenance and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer s warranty DEALER SERVICE Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person nel special tools and equipment to perform all service operations in an expert manner Service Manuals are available which include detailed service information for your vehicle Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure yourself NOTE Intentional tampering with emissions control systems can result in civil penalties being assessed against you WARNING You can be badly injured working on or
196. is used a corresponding button number will be displayed Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to push button memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191 Operation Instructions CD MODE for CD Audio Play NOTE e The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio e Note This Radio is capable of playing compact discs CD recordable compact discs CD R rewritable compact discs CD RW compact discs with MP3 tracks and multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks Inserting Compact Disc s Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD icon will illuminate on the radio display CAUTION This CD player will accept 4 3 4 inch 12 cm discs only The use of other sized discs may damage the CD player mechanism You may eject a disc with the radio OFF If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio ON the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and begin to play when you insert the disc The display will show the disc number the track number and index time in minutes and seconds Play will begin at the start of track 1 SEEK Button CD MODE for CD Audio Play Press the right side of the SEEK button for the next selection on the CD Press the left side of the button to return
197. istance new entry transfer call no UConnect Tutorial pager try again pair a phone voice training phone pairing pairing work phonebook phone book yes previous redial record again es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107 General Information This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following conditions e Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment e This device may not cause harmful interference e This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation SEATS Front Seat Adjustment If Equipped The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seats near the floor Pull the bar upward to move the seat to the desired position Manual Adjusting Bar 108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Using body pressure move forward and rearward onthe Six Way Power Seat with Manual Recliner If seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched Equipped WARNING WARNING e Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the seat dangerous The sudden movement of the seat belt is no longer resting against your chest In a could cause you to lose control The sea
198. ith extended use the Hazard Warning Flasher may wear down your battery IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS In any of the following situations you can reduce the potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac tion e On the highways Slow down e In city traffic While stopped put transaxle in NEUTRAL but do not increase engine idle speed EN WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 293 If the pointer of the Coolant Temperature Gage rises to the H red mark the instrument cluster will sound a chime Pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into the normal range If the pointer remains on the H red mark for more than a minute turn the engine off immediately and call for service NOTE There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition If your air conditioner is on turn it off The air conditioning system adds heat to the engine cooling system and turning off the A C removes this heat You can also turn the temperature control to maximum heat the mode control to floor and the fan control to high This allows the heater core to act asa supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system CAUTION Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your vehicle If the coolant temperature gauge reads H pull over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle when safe Turn the
199. ith the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UN LOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm 5 If the desired programming was not achieved or to reactivate this feature repeat the above steps To Lock the Doors and Liftgate Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter to lock all doors The turn signal lights will flash and the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock signal If desired the Sound Horn on Lock feature can be turned on or off For EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual For non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the LOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the LOCK button is pressed after four seconds press the PANIC button Release both buttons The Sound Horn on Lock feature can be reactivated by repeating this procedure en THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23 To Turn Off Flash Lights with Lock NOTE The Flash Lights with Lock feature can be turned on or off For EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual For non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds 2 While the UNLOCK bu
200. k feature activated Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Delay Turning Headlights Off When this feature is selected the driver can choose to have the headlights remain on for 0 30 60 or 90 seconds when exiting the vehicle Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until 0 30 60 or 90 appears to make your selection Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit When this feature is selected the power window switches radio hands free system DVD video system power sunroof and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch has been turned OFF Opening a vehicle door will cancel this feature Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 45 sec 5 min or 10 min appears to make your selection Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock When this feature is selected the headlights will activate and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are unlocked using the RKE transmitter Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until OFF 30 sec 60 sec or 90 sec appears to make your selection 182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Confirmation of Voice Commands If Equipped When ON is selected all voice commands from the U Connect system are confirmed Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until ON or OFF appears to make your selection Display English or Metric The EVIC
201. king Speak normally without pausing just as you would speak to a person sitting a few feet meters away from you Make sure that no one other than you is speaking during a voice recognition period Performance is maximized under e low to medium blower setting e low to medium vehicle speed e low road noise e smooth road surface e fully closed windows e dry weather condition Even though the system is designed for users speaking in North American English French and Spanish ac cents the system may not always work for some When navigating through an automated system such as voice mail or when sending a page at the end of speaking the digit string make sure to say Send Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is not in motion is recommended It is not recommended to store similar sounding names in the UConnect phonebook Phonebook Downloaded and UConnect Local name recognition rate is optimized when the entries are not similar You can say O letter O for 0 zero 800 must be spoken eight zero zero ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101 e Even though international dialing for most number combinations is supported some shortcut dialing number combinations may not be supported e Ina convertible vehicle system performance may be compromised with the convertible top down Far End Audio Performance e Audio quality is maximized under e low to medium blower setting
202. knob or wait five seconds RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the rotary TUNE control clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREB will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones 202 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL EBENEN Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to adjust the sound level from the right or left side speakers Press the rotary TUNE control a fifth time and FADE will display Turn the TUNE control to the left or right to adjust the sound level between the front and rear speakers Press the tune control again or wait five seconds to exit setting tone balance and fade RND SET Button Radio Mode To Set The Pu
203. le locks These numbers can be used to order duplicate keys from your authorized dealer Ask your authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe place 81182d3d Three Button Vehicle Key Ignition Key Removal Automatic Transaxle Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift lever knob pushbutton has returned to the outward position Turn the ignition switch to the ACC position push the key and cylinder inward rotate the key to the LOCK position and remove the key ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13 EESE EE SEEE Ignition Switch Positions 3 ON 4 START 1 LOCK 2 ACC ACCESSORY NOTE If you try to remove the key before you place the shift lever in PARK the key may become trapped tem porarily in the ignition cylinder If this occurs rotate the key to the right slightly then remove the key as de scribed If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service WARNING Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be seri ously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in the ignition A child could operate power windows other controls or move the vehicle 14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFOR
204. lem with the anti lock brake system reservoir 168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ME If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged and the fluid level is at the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti Lock Brake System ABS Electronic Stability Program ESP sys tem In this case the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected If the problem is related to the brake booster the ABS pump will run when applying the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic system A leak in either half of the dual brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has dropped below a specified level The light will remain on until the cause is corrected NOTE The light may flash momentarily during sharp cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi tions The vehicle should have service performed and the brake fluid level checked If brake failure is indicated immediate repair is neces sary WARNING Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is dangerous Part of the brake system may have failed It will take longer to stop the vehicle You could ha
205. ler Brakes Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer This could cause inadequate braking and possible personal injury An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is required when towing a trailer with electronically actuated brakes When towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated brake system an electronic brake controller is not required Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg and required for trailers in excess of 2 000 Ibs 907 kg CAUTION If the trailer weighs more than 1 000 Ibs 454 kg loaded it should have its own brakes and they should be of adequate capacity Failure to do this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear higher brake pedal effort and longer stopping distances WARNING Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle s hy draulic brake lines It can overload your brake sys tem and cause it to fail You might not have brakes when you need them and could have an accident Towing any trailer will increase your stopping dis tance When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you Failure to do so could result in an accident 286 STARTING AND OPERATING Towing Requirements Trailer Lights And Wiring Whenever you pull a trailer regardless of the trailer size stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for moto
206. lies fluid to both the Brake System and the Clutch Release System The two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in one system will not affect the other system The manual ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 331 CAUTION Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall transaxle Clutch Release System should not require fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle If the Brake Fluid Reservoir is low and the brake system does not indicate any leaks or other problems it may be a result of a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System See your local authorized dealer for service Use only manufacturer s recommended brake fluid Re fer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts found later in this section for the correct fluid type WARNING Use of a brake fluid that has a lower initial boiling point than the recommended MOPAR DOT 3 prod uct or a brake fluid that is unidentified as to FMVSS specification may result in sudden brake failure during hard prolonged braking You could have an accident clutch system performance Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle WARNING Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire 332 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fl
207. light will flash slowly and then rapidly when fully trained If you unplugged the device for training plug it back in at this time Then proceed with Step 4 under Programming HomeLink earlier in this section Security It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn in your vehicle To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes Note that all channels will be erased Individual channels cannot be erased The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active 138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Troubleshooting Tips If you are having trouble programming HomeLink here are some of the most common solutions e Replace the battery in the original transmitter e Press the Learn button on the Garage Door Opener to complete the training for a Rolling Code e Did you unplug the device for training and remember to plug it back in If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance General Information This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry Canada RSS 210 Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference 2 This device must accept any interference that may be received including interference that may cause undesired operati
208. ll as engine emis sions well within current government regulations C system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light MIL OBD II will also store diagnostic codes and other information to assist an authorized service technician in making repairs Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing see your authorized dealer for service as soon as possible If any of these systems require service the OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message After fuel is added the vehicle diagnostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged A gASCAP message will be displayed in the instrument cluster Tighten the gas cap until a clicking sound is heard This is an indication that the gas cap is properly tightened Press the odometer reset button to turn the message off If the problem persists the message will appear the next time the vehicle is started This might indicate a damaged cap If the problem is detected twice in a row the system will turn on the MIL Resolving the problem will turn the MIL light off EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS In some localities it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle s emissions control system Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration For states that require an Inspection and Mainte nance I M this check verifies the Malfunction 312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Indicator Light M
209. ll result in a MAX reading on these engines CAUTION Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level above the MAX mark on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase in oil temperature This could damage your engine ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 315 Change Engine Oil Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the interval at which your oil should be changed Check the following list to decide if any apply to you e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling Driving in dusty conditions e Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C e Trailer towing e Taxi Police or delivery service commercial service e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel NOTE If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or three months whichever comes first and follow Maintenance Sched ule B All Engines in Section 8 of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipped with a Non Turbocharged Engine then change your engine oil at every interval shown on Maintenance Schedule A Non Turbo in Section 8 of this manual If none of these apply to you and your vehicle is equipp
210. ll the doors and liftgate When the UNLOCK button is pressed the illuminated entry will initiate and the parking lights will flash on twice The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles equipped with EVIC Refer to Turn Headlamps on with Remote Key Unlock under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual for details NOTE The system can also be programmed to unlock all doors on the first press of the UNLOCK button For EVIC equipped vehicles refer to Remote Unlock Driv ers Door 1st under Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle In formation Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual For non EVIC equipped vehicles perform the following steps 1 Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter 22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 Continue to hold the LOCK button at least four seconds but not longer than 10 seconds then press and hold the UNLOCK button A single chime will sound to indicate that this feature has changed 3 Release both buttons at the same time 4 Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK UNLOCK button on the RKE trans mitter NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door w
211. ls cargo that is not fully secured dynamic load shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to control You could lose control of your vehicle and e GCWR must not be exceeded have an accident e Total weight must be distributed between the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the following four ratings are not exceeded 1 GVWR 2 GIW 3 GAWR 4 TW Trailer Tongue Weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized This requirement may limit the ability to always achieve the 10 to 15 range of trailer tongue weight as a percentage of total trailer weight Towing Requirements Tires e Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact spare tire 284 STARTING AND OPERATING ME e Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle Refer to Tires General Information in this manual for proper tire inflation procedures Also check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage before towing a trailer Refer to Tires General Infor mation in this manual for the proper inspection procedure When replacing tire refer to Tires General Informa tion in this manual for proper tire replacement pro cedures Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicles GVWR and GAWR limits ee STARTING AND OPERATING 285 Towing Requirements Trai
212. ls 1 400 Ibs 635 kg and there will be five 150 Ib 68 kg passengers in your vehicle the amount of 252 STARTING AND OPERATING ME available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 295 kg since 5 x 150 750 and 1400 750 650 Ibs 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle NOTE The following table shows examples on how to calcu late total load cargo luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 Ibs 392 kg Occupants TOTAL FRONT REAR EXAMPLE 1 Combined weight of occupants and cargo from Tire Placard MINUS Combined Occupant s weight Occupant 1 200 Ibs Occupant 2 130 Ib Occupant 3 160 Ibs STARTING AND OPERATING 253 AVAILABLE Cargo Luggage and Trailer Tongue Weight 195 Ibs EXAMPLE 2 Oc
213. lt sioe css ef ren 132 Downshifting issued tee Rcg TREO eR Ro 227 Driving On Slippery Surfaces 0 00004 234 Through Flowing Rising or Shallow Standing Water is sos 9654993400440 e 235 Electric Rear Window Defrost 150 Electric Remote Mirrors llle 78 Electrical Power Outlets 0 141 Electronic Speed Control Cruise Control 129 Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC dss arise caging Guth Bedhead d are dh dg d 171 176 Emergency In Case of Jacking ote ice guod ear CURE ese d a dat 294 JUMP Staring s cive veg ih Re PR wes 301 TOWING Shan eade Set booths stus R 304 Emergency Seat Back Release Sedan 152 Emission Control System Maintenance 311 354 Engine Break In Recommendations 396 INDEX BEEN Checking Oil Level sas acisi piis ae e aa a 314 Coolant Antifreeze llle 324 Coolmip a s aean eating ead boheme E D 324 Exhaust Gas Caution nna aaa aaa aaa 272 Fuel Requirements 000 269 Jump Starting sesse ses es e xem Rees 301 oM CT 314 350 351 Oil Change Interval 225 5 ens 315 Oil Filler Cap sisestati sain eee ae as 309 310 316 Qil Filter 2v e ct aoe eae Shida do Ase ER 351 Oil Sel ctioft 1s aer eR Roa a RRs 316 Oil Synthetic Lassus seta ee de Rx d deeds es 316 Overheating us 25 enaa bet oe eee de 292 Temperature Gauge llle 162 Ethanol uu eR yes pom e DEG 269 Event Data Recorder less 59 Exh
214. lter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X c Inspect the brake linings X X E Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped X S with four wheel disc brakes C Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables X D Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X y Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces X E sary not required if previously changed t S Replace the make up air filter X 8 Adjust the generator drive belt tension X Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not replaced at 100 000 miles X 160 000 km M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 376 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES ME Miles 65 000 70 000 75 000 80 000 85 000 90 000 Kilometers 104 000 112 000 120 000 128 000 136 000 144 000 Months 78 84 90 96 102 108 Change engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped X with four wheel disc brakes Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces X sary not required if previously changed t Replace the make up air filter X Adjust the generator drive belt tension X E MAINTENA
215. ly deactivated to prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated brake temperatures NOTE Extended heavy use of Traction Control may cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TCS Indicator light located in the instrument cluster This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is a normal condition The system will remain disabled for about four minutes until the brakes have cooled The 054903773 system will automatically reactivate and turn off the TCS 1 U S DOT Safety Standards E Maimam Lodd Indicator light Code TIN 2 Size Designation 5 Maximum Pressure If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud ice or snow turn 3 Service Description 6 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades the Traction Control System Off before attempting to rock the vehicle free 246 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE P Passenger Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards P Metric tires have the letter P molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa tion Example P215 65R15 95H European Metric tire sizing is based on European design standards Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width The letter P is absent from this tire size designation Example 215 65R15 96H LT Light Truck Metric tire sizing is based on U S design standards The size designation for LT Metric tires is the same as for P Metric tires
216. m Care All wheels and wheel trim especially aluminum and chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion To remove heavy soil and or excessive brake dust use MOPAR Wheel Cleaner 05066247AB or equivalent or select a nonabrasive non acidic cleaner Do not use scouring pads steel wool a bristle brush or metal polishes Only MOPAR or equivalent is recommended Do not use oven cleaner Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels protective finish Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface Cleaning Interior Trim Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp cloth a damp cloth with MOPAR Total Clean then 338 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE WARNING Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes MOPAR Spot amp Stain Remover if absolutely necessary Do not use harsh cleaners or Armorall Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery Cleaning Leather Upholstery MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage the
217. m h Engine 1to2 2 t03 3 to 4 4to5 2 4L Non 30 48 60 97 85 136 115 185 Turbo ee STARTING AND OPERATING 227 If you exceed these speeds you may notice the engine cut in and out This is caused by an electronic limiter in the engine computer The engine will run normally when you reduce engine speed Downshifting Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and prolong engine life CAUTION If you skip a gear while downshifting or downshift at too high of an engine speed you could damage the engine transmission or clutch To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life shift down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE IF EQUIPPED WARNING Itis dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle speed If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse You could lose control of the vehicle and hit someone or something Only move the shift lever into gear when the engine is idling normally and when your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal You must step on the brake pedal and depress the shift lever knob button before you will be able to shift out of PARK 228 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION Damage to the tran
218. m the HomeLink button you wish to program Place the handheld transmitter 1 to 3 in 3 to 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program while keeping the indicator light in view 3 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink button and the handheld transmitter button until the HomeLink indicator changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light then release both the HomeLink and handheld transmitter buttons Watch for the HomeLink indicator to change flash rates When it changes it is programmed It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases The garage door may open and close while you train NOTE e Some gate operators and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator Canadian Programming section ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135 e After training a HomeLink channel if the garage door does not operate with HomeLink and the ga rage door opener was manufactured after 1995 the garage door opener may have a rolling code If so proceed to Step 5 Programming A Rolling Code System 4 Press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and the garage door or device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light proceed t
219. mation 254 Shallow Standing Water 236 Tire Pressures a4 e x era oe Rex R3 S a 254 H Power Steering c c eh 2598 MB Vite Chou 45r RE REA 262 Power Steering Fluid Check 238 N oW Ties eod os quie downs dace 3 49 262 H Parking Brake onnaa sie eph ERA 239 W Tire Rotation Recommendations 263 Mi Brake System sco rers sera crsa nkanu 241 W Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS 264 Anti Lock Brake System ABS If Base System sasi daane eee ee 266 Popped ecrit rreren eakat me Bl Fuel Requirements o o unauna auaa 269 H Traction Control System If Equipped 244 24L And 24L Turbo Engines 269 en STARTING AND OPERATING 221 Adding Wel os 21 9 0x vow 099 wy 33 9 Ra 273 Common Towing Definitions 277 Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap 273 Towing Tips ced ks re ae ee eae 287 Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message 275 W Recreational Towing M Vehicle Loading sisse ggg Prind Motorhome Bit ae crsa rispas ane Vehicle Certification Label 275 x E id M Trailer Towing eese 277 TOWING aan Dianta lUe qecet asg 289 222 STARTING AND OPERATING Se STARTING PROCEDURES Before starting your vehicle adjust your seat adjust both inside and outside mirrors and fasten your seat belts WARNING e Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattende
220. n stays on after you start the vehicle or if it comes on as you drive have the airbag system checked right away e When the ORC detects a collision requiring the front airbags it signals the inflator units A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the front airbags The front airbag covers separate and fold out of the way as the front airbags inflate to their full size The front airbags fully inflate in about 50 ms This is only about half of the time it takes you to blink your eyes The front airbags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and front passenger The driver s and pas senger s front airbag gas is vented through holes in the sides of the airbag In this way the front airbags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle e The Passenger Airbag Disable PAD Indicator Light an amber light located in the center of the instrument panel tells the driver and front passenger when the front passenger airbag is turned off The PAD Indica tor light illuminates the words PASS AIR BAG OFF to show that the front passenger airbag will not inflate during a collision requiring airbags When the right front passenger seat is empty or when very light objects are placed on the seat the passenger airbag will not inflate even though the PAD indicator light is not illuminated 022605959 Passenger Airbag Disabled Light ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51 S The PAD in
221. ndle on the seat the seat assembly can now be lifted and removed from the vehicle NOTE Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved when removed from the vehicle To reinstall the rear seat insert the seat into the floor attachments Lower the release levers of the seat to latch the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward to latch the seat Lift the seatback to its upright latched position WARNING In an accident you or others in your vehicle could be injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor attachments Always be sure the seats are fully latched es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD 2 Move the safety latch located under the front edge of To open the hood two latches must be released the hood slightly to the right of center and raise the hood 1 Pull the hood release lever located under the left side of the instrument panel 81a8ed6b Safety Latch Hood Release Lever 120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver s side of the engine compartment to secure the hood in the open position Place the hood prop at the location stamped into the inner hood surface To prevent possible damage do not slam the hood to close it Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in 20 cm and then drop it This should secure both latches
222. ndows use the A C Panel and Blower controls Direct the panel outlets toward the side windows Do not use recirculate without A C for long periods as fogging may occur Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re moved by using the defrost position If the fogging problem persists clean the inside window surfaces The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect ing on the inside surface of the glass NOTE In cold weather the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the inside because of moisture buildup inside the vehicle For maximum defogging use the Outside Air position Summer Operation Vehicles must be protected with a high quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for protection against overheating A 50 concentration is recommended Outside Air Intake When operating the system make sure the air intake directly in front of the windshield is free of ice slush snow or other obstructions such as leaves Leaves col lected in the air intake plenum may reduce airflow and plug the plenum water drains The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of vehicle operation 218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Side Window Demisters A side window demister outlet is at each end of the instrument panel These nonadjustable outlets direct air toward the si
223. nds or while towing trail ers use 3rd gear DRIVE 3rd This range eliminates shifts into OVERDRIVE The trans axle will operate normally in 1st and 2nd while in this range NOTE Using 3rd gear while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor mance fuel economy and extend transaxle life by reduc ing excessive shifting and heat build up Use 3rd gear when descending steep grades to prevent brake system distress LOW 1st This range should be used for maximum engine braking when descending steep grades In this range up shifts will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down shifts from 2nd to 1st gear will occur as early as possible Brake Transmission Interlock System This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is pressed This system is active only while the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position Always step on the brake pedal and depress the shift lever knob button before shifting out of PARK NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will function normally except you may be able to shift the vehicle from 232 STARTING AND OPERATING Se PARK without depressing the brake pedal If this occurs obtain service from an authorized dealer as soon as possible Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK and the shift lever k
224. next time the vehicle is started See your authorized dealer service center as soon as possible 9 Cruise Indicator If Equipped CRUISE Tris indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Control system is ON NOTE The word SET will not illuminate when the Speed Control System is on 10 Malfunction Indicator Light MIL The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL is part of i an onboard diagnostic system called OBD that monitors engine and automatic transmission con trol systems The light will illuminate when the key is in the ON position before engine start If the bulb does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON have the condition checked promptly Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap poor fuel quality etc may illuminate the MIL after engine start The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through several of your typical driving cycles In most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will not require towing If the MIL flashes when the engine is running serious conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs 11 Odometer Trip Odometer Reset Button Press this button to change the display from odometer to either of the two trip odometer settings Trip A or Trip B will appear when in the trip odometer mode Push in and hold the button for two seconds t
225. nge engine oil and engine oil filter X X X X X X Rotate tires X X X X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped X with four wheel disc brakes Replace the engine air cleaner filter X Replace the spark plugs X Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals X Inspect the PCV valve replace if necessary not X Replace the make up air filter gt x lt Adjust the generator drive belt tension M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 380 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EBENEN This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer WARNING to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis sions warranty You can be badly injured working on or around a motor t This maintenance is not required if previously replaced vehicle Dy only Vae service Work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment If you have Inspection and service should also be performed anytime any doubt about your ability to perform a service job a malfunction is observed or suspected Retain all take your vehicle to a competent mechanic receipts M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE CONTENTS ll Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Vehicle s ree eR enr UR AIR dad t RE 383 Speech Impaired TDD TIY
226. nguage Foreign Language Talk Talk Information Information Top 40 Top 40 Jazz Jazz Weather Weather 190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is displayed the radio will be tuned to the next frequency station with the same selected PTY name The PTY function only operates when in the FM mode If a preset button is activated while in the PTY Program Type mode the PTY mode will be exited and the radio will tune to the preset station SET DIR Button Radio Mode To Set the Push Button Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to push button memory press the SET DIR button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET DIR button the station will continue to play but will not be stored into push button memory You may add a second station to each push button by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET DIR button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into push button memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the push button twice Every time a preset button
227. ning Light 163 Quality Grading is ccs Re eR s 389 Radial 33 decer ESSERE 257 Replacement 4 dice b oe eR AS 261 ROtatiOn paese dehh eae oh RE Re ws 263 Safety uude und ced benedi i des 245 254 Js MT CPC M 247 Snow Tires i224 deg oa Rug deed 9 262 Spare Tie csuluesseed gated cd i e ecd rs 295 SPINNING uses e xia EA RE PER ea YE E 259 Tread Wear Indicators 00 0005 259 Tongue Weight Trailer Weight 281 TOWING coh cv ea poner EE Od eS SEE 277 24 Hour Towing Assistance 94 Disabled Vehicle 2 0 00 000 eee eee 304 Guide 2 4 gone dale ne al ae He G GR RA 280 Recreational 0 0 0 0 0 ee ee 289 Weight a sse r3 o REG Ra E ex eaans 4 a 280 Towing Assistance oeie seil eee 94 Traction Control llle 244 Traction Control Switch llle 244 Trailer TOWN iau kde derer aw AUR end 277 Cooling System Tips 00000 288 Hitches i dnas tan reepa RR m IER RN 280 Minimum Requirements 04 282 Trailer and Tongue Weight 281 Wiring 222 eR RAI Pet at P IT RE 4d 286 Trailer Towing Guide 050 280 Trailer Weight oers tare mex me PER 280 Transaxle 52s aede E ater a 227 Additives 2 beso der RR 334 Automatic llle 12 222 227 332 AUtOSUCK aerua caren aR ate ee a een ea 232 Fillet EET 334 en INDEX 407 Maintenanice o euis ane eae eae eee als 332 Manual 2 RR b ease es 14 222 225 Op
228. nob pushbutton is out It also prevents moving the shift lever out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position and the brake pedal is depressed NOTE If a malfunction occurs the system will trap the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain service AUTOSTICK IF EQUIPPED Autostick is a driver interactive transmission that offers manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more control Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak ing eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts and improve overall vehicle performance This system can also provide you with more control during passing city driving cold slippery conditions mountain driving trailer towing and many other situations Operation The Autostick position is just below the OVERDRIVE position and is identified by the word Autostick When you move the shift lever into the Autostick position it can be moved from side to side Moving the lever to the left triggers a downshift and to the right an upshift The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear display located in the instrument cluster ee STARTING AND OPERATING 233 NOTE e In Autostick mode the transmission will only shift up and down when the driver manually moves the shift lever right D or left D e An UPSHIFT message will
229. ns on or turns on while driving it indicates that the Anti Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and that service is required However the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not turn on when the Ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the light inspected by an authorized dealer 22 Oil Pressure Warning Light QE This light indicates low engine oil pressure The light should turn on momentarily when the engine es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171 is started If the light turns on while driving stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible A chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns on Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected This light does not show how much oil is in the engine The engine oil level must be checked under the hood 23 Airbag Warning Light This light turns on and remains on for seven 9 seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON If the light is not on during starting stays on or turns on while driving have the system inspected by an authorized dealer as soon as possible 24 High Beam Indicator This indicator shows that the headlights are on high beam Push the multifunction lever forward to
230. nt or abrasive cleaners If soap is used wipe clean with a clean damp rag 2 Dry with a soft tissue Seat Belt Maintenance Do not bleach dye or clean the belts with chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners This will weaken the fabric Sun damage can also weaken the fabric If the belts need cleaning use a mild soap solution or lukewarm water Do not remove the belts from the car to wash them Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the buckles do not work properly Dry with a soft tissue en MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 341 FUSES Integrated Power Module IPM The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly This center contains cartridge fuses and mini fuses Integrated Power Module Cavity Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description EMPTY 20 Amp Yel low AWD ECU Feed 10 Amp Red CHMSL Brake Switch Feed 10 Amp Red Ignition Switch Feed 20 Amp Yel Trailer Tow low 10 Amp Red IOD Sw Pwr Mir Ocm Steer ing Cntrl Sdar Hfm 30 Amp IOD Sense1 Green 342 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE BEEN Cartridge eas s Cartridge or de Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description Cavity Hane Mini Fuse Description 8 30 Amp IOD Sense2 15 50 Amp Red RAD Fan Green Relay Bat 9 40 Amp Power Seats tery Feed Green 16 15 Amp Lt IGN Run 10 20 Am
231. ntervals shown on Maintenance Schedule B NOTE For vehicles with a Turbo engine a small amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is normal The amount will depend on driving style The air 318 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make up air filter element should be installed during the normal air filter maintenance procedure WARNING The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection in the case of engine backfire Do not remove the air cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or maintenance Make sure that no one is near the engine compartment before starting the vehicle with the air cleaner removed Failure to do so can result in serious personal injury Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters varies considerably Only high quality filters should be used to assure most efficient service MOPAR engine air cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recommended Maintenance Free Battery Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance free battery You will never have to add water nor is periodic main tenance required WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn or even blind you Do not allow battery fluid to contact your eyes skin or clothing Do not lean over a battery when attaching clamps If acid splashes in eyes or on skin flush the area imme diately with large amoun
232. ntil all twelve ESN SID digits have been displayed The SEEK DOWN will page down until the first four digits are displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With RAQ Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and TIME buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds All twelve ESN SID num bers will be displayed The radio will exit the ESN SID mode when any other button is pushed the ignition is turned OFF or 5 minutes has passed since any button was pushed ESN SID Access With Navigation Radios Please refer to your Navigation User s Manual Selecting Satellite Mode in REF and RAQ Radios Selecting Satellite Mode REF Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode 208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Selecting Satellite Mode RAQ Radio Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word SAT appears in the display These radios will also display the current station name and program type For more information such as song title and artist press the MSG or INFO button A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio mode Selecting a Channel Press and hold SEEK to bypass stations or use the TUNE knob to search for the next
233. nts and cargo for your vehicle Towing Requirements To promote proper break in of your new vehicle driv etrain components the following guidelines are recom mended CAUTION e Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles 805 km of vehicle operation Doing so may damage your vehicle Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 283 CAUTION Continued e When hauling cargo or towing a trailer do not over load your vehicle or trailer Overloading can cause a During the first 500 miles 805 km of trailer loss of control poor performance or damage to brakes towing limit your speed to 50 mph 80 km h axle engine transmission steering suspension chas sis structure or tires Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this manual When towing a trailer never exceed the GAWR Safety chains must always be used between your or GCWR ratings vehicle and trailer Always connect the chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch Cross the WARNING chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough slack for turning corners e Improper towing can lead to an injury accident e Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer and will not shift during travel When trailering Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade When parking apply the parking brake on the tow vehicle Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in PARK Always block or chock the trailer whee
234. nue to operate This 2nd gear limp in feature allows the vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer for service without damaging the transaxle In the event that the problem has been momentary the transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears 1 Stop the vehicle and move the shift lever into PARK 2 Turn the ignition to OFF then restart the engine 3 Move the shift lever into DRIVE and resume driving 4 If the transaxle cannot be reset authorized dealer service is required NOTE Even if the transaxle can be reset it is recom mended that you visit an authorized dealer at your earliest possible convenience Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur Gear Ranges DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL positions into another gear range PARK This range supplements the parking brake by locking the transmission The engine can be started in this range Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion Apply the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range Always apply the parking brake first and then move the shift lever into the PARK position 230 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in and near the vehicle As with all vehicles you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running Before exiting a vehicle you should always shift the vehicle into PARK remove the key from the igniti
235. o Step 5 Pro gramming A Rolling Code System 5 Programming A Rolling Code System At the garage door opener motor in the garage locate the Learn or Training button This can usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the garage door opener motor It is NOT the button normally used to open and close the door B1c4849d Training The Garage Door Opener 1 Door Opener 2 Training Button 136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M 6 Firmly press and release the Learn or Training button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer NOTE There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next step after the Learn button has been pressed 7 Return to the vehicle and press the programmed HomeLink button twice holding the button for two seconds each time If the device is plugged in and activates programming is complete If the device does not activate press the button a third time for two seconds to complete the training If you have any problems or require assistance please call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at www HomeLink com for information or assistance To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons repeat each step for each remaining button DO NOT erase the channels Using HomeLink To operate simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button Activation will now occur for the trained device ie garage door opener
236. o not remove the disc within 15 seconds it will be reloaded The radio mode will continue to appear TIME Button CD Mode Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD playing time to time of day The time of day will display for five seconds RW FF CD Mode Press and hold the FF Fast Forward and the CD player will begin to fast forward until FF is released The RW Rewind button works in a similar manner Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature If the RW button is pressed the current track will reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing RND SET Button Random Play Button CD Mode Press this button while the CD is playing to activate Random play This feature plays the selections on the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press the RND button a second time to stop Random play Operating Instructions Auxiliary Mode The auxiliary AUX jack is an audio input jack which allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 205 MP3 player cassette player or microphone and utilize the vehicle s audio system to amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers The auxiliary mode becomes active when an electrical device is plugged into the AUX jack using a stand
237. o reset the trip odometer to 0 miles or kilometers The odometer must be in trip mode to reset 12 Charging System Light This light shows the status of the electrical charg ing system The light should come on when the ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb check If the light stays on or comes on while driving turn off some of the vehicle s non essential electrical devices or increase engine speed if at idle If the charging system light remains on it means that the vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging system Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY See an autho rized dealer UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167 13 Turn Signal Indicators amp The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal when the turn signal lever is operated 14 Electronic Stability Program ESP Indicator Light Traction Control System TCS Indicator Light If this indicator light flashes during accelera tion apply as little throttle as possible While driving ease up on the accelerator Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road con ditions and do not switch off the Electronic Stability Program ESP or Traction Control System TCS 15 Brake Warning Light This light monitors various brake functions BRAKE including brake fluid level and parking brake application If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied that the brake fluid level is low or that there is a prob
238. odometer and navigation system units can be changed between English and METRIC Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until US or METRIC appears to make your selection Automatic Compass Calibration The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminat ing the need to manually calibrate the compass When the vehicle is new the compass may appear erratic and the CAL indicator message will flash in the EVIC until the calibration is complete A good calibration requires a level surface and an envi ronment free from large metallic objects such as build ings bridges underground cables railroad tracks etc Calibrate the compass by driving slowly under 5 mph 8 km h in one or more complete circles in a area free from large metallic objects until the CAL indicator in the EVIC turns off The compass will now function normally NOTE Keep all magnetic objects such as laptop com puters cell phones and PDA s anything with a battery away from the compass sensor which is located in the top of the instrument panel These devices can interfere with compass accuracy and performance Manual Compass Calibration If the compass appears to be inaccurate you may wish to manually calibrate the compass Prior to calibrating the compass make sure the proper Compass Variance Value es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183 is selected Refer to Compass Variance for additional information Then continue to calibrate
239. of the retractor the vehicle should immediately be taken to your authorized dealer for service Failure NOTE to follow this warning could result in serious or fatal e If the rear center lap shoulder belt can not be pulled injury out check that the rear seatback is fully latched 42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Lap Shoulder Seat Belt Untwisting Procedure Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap shoulder belt 1 Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point 2 At about 6 to 12 in 15 to 30 cm above the latch plate grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate 3 Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the latch plate 4 Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the folded webbing Adjustable Upper Shoulder Seat Belt Anchorage In the front seat the shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt away from your neck Push up or down on the anchorage button to release the anchorage and move it up or down to the position that fits you best Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt As a guide if you are shorter than average you will prefer a lower position and if you are taller than average ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43 you ll prefer a higher position When you release the anchorage try
240. oice commands can be used to operate the UConnect system and to navigate through the UConnect menu structure Voice commands are required after most UConnect system prompts You will be prompted for a specific command and then guided through the available options e Prior to giving a voice command one must wait for the beep which follows the Ready prompt or another prompt e For certain operations compound commands can be used For example instead of saying Setup and then Phone Pairing the following compound command can be said Setup Phone Pairing e For each feature explanation in this section only the combined form of the voice command is given You can also break the commands into parts and say each part of the command when you are asked for it For example you can use the combined form voice com mand Phonebook New Entry or you can break the combined form command into two voice commands Phonebook and New Entry Please remember the UConnect system works best when you talk in a normal conversational tone as if speaking to someone sitting a few feet meters away from you Voice Command Tree Refer to Voice Tree in this section Help Command If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to know your options at any prompt say Help following the beep The UConnect system will play all the options at any prompt if you ask for help ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83 To activate
241. ol with a variable pause between cycles desirable For maximum delay between cycles rotate the control knob into the upper end of the delay range 8194cb23 The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until it enters the LO continual speed position 128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to an accident You might not see other vehicles or other obstacles To avoid sudden icing of the windshield during freezing weather warm the windshield with defroster before and during wind shield washer use NOTE If the front wiper is operating when the ignition is turned OFF the wiper will automatically return to the PARK position When the vehicle is restarted the wipers will resume operation TILT STEERING COLUMN To tilt the column push down on the lever below the multifunction lever and move the steering wheel up or down as desired Pull the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place Tilt Steering Column Control es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129 WARNING Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is moving is dangerous Without a stable steering col umn you could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Adjust the column only while the ve hicle is stopped Be sure it is locked before driving ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL IF EQUIPPED When engaged Electronic Speed Control takes over t
242. ollowed To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and reducing light output avoid wiping with a dry cloth To remove road dirt wash with a mild soap solution fol lowed by rinsing Do not use abrasive cleaning components solvents steel wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses Glass Surfaces All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis with MOPAR Glass Cleaner or any commercial household type glass cleaner Never use an abrasive type cleaner Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win dow equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear quarter window equipped with the radio antenna Do not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may scratch the elements When cleaning the rear view mirror spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror Instrument Panel Cover The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which minimizes reflections in the windshield Do not use protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections Use soap and warm water to restore the low glare surface 340 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are molded in clear plastic When cleaning the lenses care must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic 1 Clean with a wet soft rag A mild soap solution may be used but do not use high alcohol conte
243. on NOTE e The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC and IC rules Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for com pliance could void the user s authority to operate the device e The term IC before the certification registration num ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139 POWER SUNROOF IF EQUIPPED The Power Sunroof switch is located in the reading lamp 815d5564 Power Sunroof Switch Turn the ignition key to the ACC or ON position press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the sunroof The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full open Momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate the Express Open feature causing the sunroof to open automatically Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof switch to open the vent The sunroof can be stopped at any position between closed and full vent To close the sunroof from the vent position press and hold the switch forward Releasing the switch will stop the movement of the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial vent position until the switch is pushed forward again Express Open Feature During the Express Open operation any movement of the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a partial open position Again momentarily pressing the switch rearward will activate th
244. on and apply the parking brake Once the key is removed from the ignition the shift lever is locked in the PARK position securing the vehicle against unwanted movement Furthermore you should never leave unattended children inside a vehicle The following indicators should be used to ensure that you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position e When moving the shift lever into PARK depress the button on the shift lever knob and firmly move the lever all the way forward until it stops e ook at the shift indicator window on the console to ensure it is in the PARK position e When engaged in PARK you will not be able to move the shift lever rearward without depressing the lever s knob button CAUTION Before moving the shift lever out of PARK you must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering wheel and shift lever are released Otherwise dam age to the steering column or shift lever could result REVERSE Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop NEUTRAL The engine may be started in this range en STARTING AND OPERATING 231 DRIVE OVERDRIVE This range should be used for most city and highway driving It provides smoothest upshifts and downshifts and best fuel economy When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the DRIVE OVERDRIVE range such as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions in hilly terrain traveling into strong head wi
245. on airbag material may sometimes cause abra sions and or skin reddening to the driver and front passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor They are not caused by contact with chemicals They are not permanent and normally heal quickly However if you haven t healed significantly within a few days or if you have any blistering see your doctor immediately As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke like particles The particles are a normal by product of the process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag inflation These airborne particles may irritate the skin eyes nose or throat If you have skin or eye irritation rinse the area with cool water For nose or throat irritation move to fresh air If the irritation continues see your doctor If these particles settle on your clothing follow the garment manufacturer s instruc tions for cleaning 56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M e It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the airbags have deployed If you are involved in another collision the airbags will not be in place to protect you WARNING Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision Have the airbags seat belt pretensioners front passenger seat belt retractor assembly and Occupant Classification Sys tem replaced by an autho
246. on dictates cessation of the call on the UConnect system and transfer of the call to the mobile phone e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system for a certain dura tion after which the call is automatically transferred from the UConnect system to the mobile phone e An active call is automatically transferred to the mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF UConnect System Features Language Selection To change the language that the UConnect system is using e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say the name of the language you wish to switch to English Espanol or Francais e Continue to follow the system prompts to complete language selection ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93 After selecting one of the languages all prompts and voice commands will be in that language NOTE After every UConnect language change opera tion only the language specific 32 name phonebook is usable The paired phone name is not language specific and usable across all languages Emergency Assistance If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is reachable e Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency number for your area If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect system is operational you may reach the emergency number as follows e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready
247. on of this Owner s Manual SATELLITE RADIO IF EQUIPPED Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast ing technology to provide clear digital sound coast to coast The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite Radio This service offers over 100 channels of music sports news entertainment and programming for chil dren directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios System Activation To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service call the toll free number 888 539 7474 or visit the Sirius web site at www sirius com or at www siriuscanada ca for Cana dian residents Please have the following information available when activating your system 1 The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID 2 Credit card information 3 Your Vehicle Identification Number ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 207 Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Number ESN SID The Electronic Serial Number Sirius Identification Num ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio system To access the ESN SID refer to the following steps ESN SID Access With REF Radios With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and the radio OFF press the CD Eject and Time buttons simultaneously for 3 seconds The first four digits of the twelve digit ESN SID number will be displayed Press the SEEK UP button to display the next four digits Continue to press the SEEK UP button u
248. on the lap belt across your thighs below your abdomen To remove slack in the lap belt portion pull up on the shoulder belt To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision 40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING WARNING A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of internal injury in a collision The belt forces won t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones but across your abdomen Always wear the lap belt as low as pos sible and keep it snug e A twisted belt can t do its job as well In a collision it could even cut into you Be sure the belt is straight If you can t straighten a belt in your vehicle take it to your authorized dealer and have it fixed 5 Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is not protect you properly The lap portion could ride too high on your body possibly causing internal injuries Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well In a sudden stop you could move too far forward increasing the possibility of injury Wear your seat belt snugly 6 To release the belt push the red button on the buckle The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position If necessary slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the bel
249. on tire safety MA Code representing the tire manufacturing location two digits L9 Code representing the tire size two digits ABCD Code used by the tire manufacturer one to four digits 03 means the 3rd week 03 Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured two digits 01 means the year 2001 01 Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured two digits Prior to July 2000 tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured Example 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991 250 STARTING AND OPERATING Tire Loading and Tire Pressure Tire and Loading Information Placard Tire Placard Location f SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL 5 THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCC NEVER EXCEED XXX F NOTE The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver s side B Pillar P195 70R14 T125 70D15 200kPa 29PSI 420kPa 60PSI SEE OWNER S MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AR 4N109268 J 811b5a9a Tire and Loading Information Placard This placard tells you important information about the 1 number of people that can be carried in the vehicle 2 total weight your vehicle can carry 3 tire size designed for your vehicle 4 cold tire inflation pressures for the front rear and spare tires ee STARTING AND OPERATING 251 Loading The ve
250. onal rust inhibitors or antirust products as they may not be compatible with the engine coolant antifreeze and may plug the radiator Continued 326 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M CAUTION Continued When adding engine coolant antifreeze e This vehicle has not been designed for use with g The manufacturer recommends using MOPAR Propylene Glycol based engine coolant anti Antifreeze Coolant 5 Year 100 000 Mile Formula freeze Use of propylene glycol based engine HOAT Hybrid Organic Additive Technology coolant antifreeze is not recommended e Mix a minimum solution of 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze and distilled water Use higher concentra tions not to exceed 70 if temperatures below 34 F Adding Coolant Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine 37 C are anticipated coolant antifreeze that allows extended maintenance intervals This engine coolant antifreeze can be used up Use only high purity water such as distilled or deion to five years or 102 000 miles 170 000 km before ized water when mixing the water engine coolant replacement To prevent reducing this extended mainte antifreeze solution The use of lower quality water nance period it is important that you use the same will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the engine coolant antifreeze throughout the life of your engine cooling system vehicle Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic A
251. one turn while the wheel is still on the ground WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 299 CAUTION Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the cross member below the radiator on the front sus pension cross member or on the rear axle assembly 2 There are two jacking locations on each side of the body one at the front of the vehicle and one in the rear on the trailing arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol Turn the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be changed Jacking Locations 1 Front Jacking Location 2 Rear Jacking Location Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is securely engaged 300 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EE 3 Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right using the swivel wrench Raise the vehicle only until the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is obtained to install the spare tire Minimum tire lift provides maximum stability WARNING Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make the vehicle less stable It could slip off the jack and hurt someone near it Raise the vehicle only enough to remove the tire 4 Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel covers where applicable off the hub Install the spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the nuts toward the wheel Lightly tighten the nuts To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
252. ontrol System Maintenance 354 Maintenance Schedule B All Engines Bl Maintenance Schedules 354 Maintenance Schedule A At Each Stop For Fuel nesreco tosses ieres 356 ai i a esq Pais tede Once a Month iiis sese 356 Mintenauge colegios a qn At Each Oil Chang lt lt lt secs seiras 356 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 354 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES MEM EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure the continued proper functioning of the Emissions Con trol System These and all other maintenance services included in this manual should be done to provide best vehicle performance and reliability More frequent main tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip driving Inspection and service should also be done anytime a malfunction is suspected NOTE Maintenance replacement or repair of the emis sions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be performed by any automotive repair establishment or individual using any automotive part that has been certified pursuant to U S EPA or in the State of Califor nia California Air Resources Board regulations MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES There are three maintenance schedules that show re q
253. ook accessible only in that language In addition if equipped and supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads mobile phone s phonebook 86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Phonebook Download Automatic Phonebook transfer from Mobile phone If equipped and specifically supported by your phone UConnect automatically downloads names text names and number entries from the mobile phone s phonebook Specific Bluetooth Phones with Phone Book Access Profile may support this feature See UConnect website for supported phones To call a name from downloaded or UConnect Phonebook follow the procedure in Call by Saying a Name section Automatic download and update if supported begins as soon as the phone Bluetooth wireless connection is made to the UConnect For example after you start the vehicle Maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down loaded and updated every time a phone is connected to the UConnect Depending on the maximum number of entries down loaded there may be a short delay before the latest downloaded names can be used Until then if avail able previous downloaded phonebook is available for use Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile phone is accessible Only the Mobile phone s phonebook is downloaded SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phone book This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or deleted on the UConnect These
254. or more than 45 minutes of continuous operation Refer to the Maintenance Schedules in Section 8 for the proper maintenance intervals Special Additives Automatic Transmission Fluid ATF is an engineered product and its performance may be impaired by supple mental additives Therefore do not add any fluid addi tives to the transaxle The only exception to this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid leaks In addition avoid using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect seals Manual Transaxle Lubricant Selection Use only the manufacturer s recommended transmission fluid Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in this section for the correct fluid type Fluid Level Check Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug The fluid level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a point not more that 3 16 in 4 7 mm below the bottom of the hole ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 335 Add fluid if necessary to maintain the proper level Frequency Of Fluid Change Under normal operating conditions the fluid installed at the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of the vehicle Fluid changes are not necessary unless the following conditions exist e The lubricant has become contaminated with water If contaminated with water the fluid should be changed immediately e If severe usage has occurred refer to Maintenance Schedule B in Section 8 of this man
255. or horizontal and vertical mirror adjustment Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear window Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small control under the mirror to the night position toward the rear of the vehicle The mirror should be adjusted while set in the day position toward the windshield d 2 030403760 Adjusting Rearview Mirror Outside Mirror Driver Side Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror 78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE xe Outside Mirror Passenger Side Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the vehicle WARNING Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side convex mirror will look smaller and farther away than they really are Relying too much on your passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with another vehicle or other object Use your inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen in this convex mirror Power Mirrors If Equipped The power mirror switch is located to the left of the steering column on the instrument panel To adjust the view in the outside mirrors turn the rotary knob to the L Left O Center or R Right position After selecting the mirror move the knob in the same direction you want the mirror to move Use the O
256. or icy conditions While in the Autostick mode Electronic Speed Con trol will only function in 3rd or 4th gear Downshifting out of 3rd gear will turn off the speed control Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when Autostick is engaged If the system detects powertrain overheating the transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off e If the system detects a problem it will disable the Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the automatic mode until the problem is corrected DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES Acceleration Rapid acceleration on snow covered wet or other slip pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati cally to the right or left This phenomenon occurs when there is a difference in the surface traction under the front driving wheels en STARTING AND OPERATING 235 WARNING Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the front wheels You could lose control of the vehicle and possibly have an accident Accelerate slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction ice snow wet mud loose sand etc Traction When driving on wet or slushy roads it is possible for a wedge of water to build up between the tire and road surface This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability To re
257. ore than 50 mph 80 km h Keep inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly Replace or repair the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle Failure to do so could result in loss of vehicle control WARNING Fast spinning tires can be dangerous Forces gener ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam age or failure A tire could explode and injure some one Do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck and do not let anyone near a spinning wheel no matter what the speed Tread Wear Indicators Tire Spinning When stuck in mud sand snow or ice conditions do not spin your vehicle s wheels faster than 30 mph 48 km h or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to help you in determining when your tires should be replaced For additional information refer to Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section 6 260 STARTING AND OPERATING ME 1 Worn Tire 2 New Tire These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves They will appear as bands when the tread depth becomes 1 16 in 2 mm When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the tire should be replaced Many states have laws requiring tire replac
258. ormally a result of moisture from rain snow or high humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor ized when the thermostat opens allowing hot engine coolant antifreeze to enter the radiator If an examination of your engine compartment shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks the vehicle may be safely driven The vapor will soon dissipate e Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle Check engine coolant antifreeze freeze point in the radiator and in the coolant recovery bottle If engine coolant antifreeze needs to be added contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing e If frequent engine coolant antifreeze additions are required or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when the engine cools the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks Maintain engine coolant antifreeze concentration at 50 HOAT engine coolant antifreeze minimum and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of your engine which contains aluminum components Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed Keep the front of the radiator clean If your vehicle is equipped with air conditioning keep the front of the condenser clean also Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter operation If replacement is ever necessary install ONLY the correct type thermostat Other designs may result in unsatis
259. our vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination Note that GCWR ratings include an 150 Ibs 68 kg allowance for the presence of a driver Gross Axle Weight Rating GAWR The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear axles Distribute the load over the front and rear axles evenly Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear GAWR WARNING It is important that you do not exceed the maximum front or rear GAWR A dangerous driving condition can result if either rating is exceeded You could lose control of the vehicle and have an accident Trailer Tongue Weight TW The trailer tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer In most cases it should not be less than 10 or more than 15 of the trailer load You must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle Frontal Area The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width of the front of a trailer Trailer Sway Control The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue en STARTING AND OPERATING 279 that typically provides adjustable friction associated with the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling Weight Carrying Hitch A weight carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue weight just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle These kinds of hit
260. ow Beam Select Switch 124 PASSING lt 9 vee pve eap ber qu ER esce 125 Heated Seats us came ake wA C KEW are ae 111 Hitches Trailer Towing HomeLink Garage Door Opener Transmitter 132 Hood Release lees 119 IgritOn usse cese nesses are Ree eiet eie die 12 Key eae ara oh dig SO due d anra Rc ame de 12 Ignition Key Removal lssss 12 Immobilizer Sentry Key issus 15 20 Intant Restraint 4 603046 ed sw cv en E 61 Information Center Vehicle 05 176 Inside Rearview Mirror sss 77 Instrument Cluster 0 000000 159 162 Instrument Panel and Controls 158 Instrument Panel Cover 337 339 Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning 340 Integrated Power Module Fuses 341 Interior Appearance Care 0005 337 en INDEX 399 Intermittent Wipers Delay Wipers T27 Life OF Dess ease s per RR RES HORE en Introduction ker ra RR REFERRE d 4 Liftgate Sedan 0 000000 hight Bulbs im er seg RE RR Jack Location is 0246436 ELA RR ted 20 Lights eda GASES URAL IER Jack Op ration vae haw a a 294 297 AMD AG asilo suite mace Hee Ro de oet Jacking Instructions seem Re 297 Alarm 4 4 2 4 8 dx eden B edere te d HEC eee Jump Starting veces kk e Ree RR Td 301 Anti Lock gaudes dr PRUE sae Rel b e ine Back Up a deben beE e RR E ed Key Programming lt s sman barack maui
261. p Yel CCN Blue Acc Cigar low Power Ltr Sunroof Locks 17 10 Amp Red IOD Feed 11 15 Amp Lt Power Out CVT Mod Blue let Mod Wcm 12 20 Amp Yel Ign Run 18 40 Amp ASD Relay low Acc Inverter Green Contact 13 20 Amp Yel Pwr Run PWR Feed low Acc Outlet 19 20 Amp Yel PWR Amp RR low 1 amp Amp 2 14 10 Amp Red IOD CCN Feed Interior 20 15 Amp Lt IOD Feed Lighting Blue Radio ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 343 Cavity pete Mini Fuse Description Cavity a Mini Fuse Description 21 10 Amp Red IOD Feed 27 10 Amp Red IGN RUN Intrus Only ORC Mod Siren Feed 22 10 Amp Red IGN RUN 28 10 Amp Red IGN RUN Hvac ORC OCM Compass Feed Sensor 29 EMPTY 23 15 Amp Lt ENG ASD 30 20 Amp Yel Heated 2 31 10 Amp Red Headlamp 24 25 Amp PWR Sun Washer Re Natural roof Feed lay Control 25 10 Amp Red Heated Mir 32 30 Amp ENG ASD ror Pink Control 26 15 Amp Lt ENG ASD Feed 1 Blue Relay Feed 2 344 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M Cartridge m Cavity Fuse Mini Fuse Description 33 10 Amp Red ABS MOD J1962 Conn PCM 34 30 Amp ABS Valve Pink Feed 35 40 Amp ABS Pump Green Feed 36 30 Amp Headlamp Pink Washer Control 37 25 Amp Spare Natural CAUTION e When installing the Integrated Power Module cover it is important to ensure the cover is prop erly positioned and fully latched Failure to do so may allo
262. pants and cargo and 5 should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire and Loading Information placard Refer to the following Tire Safety Information section in this manual Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds Trailer and Tongue Weight Always load a trailer with 60 to 65 of the weight in the front of the trailer This places 10 to 15 of the Gross Trailer Weight GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of many trailer accidents Never exceed the maximum trailer tongue weight stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch 282 STARTING AND OPERATING Se 057003767 Consider the following items when computing the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle e The tongue weight of the trailer e The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment put in or on your vehicle e The weight of the driver and all passengers NOTE Remember that everything put into or on the trailer adds to the load on your vehicle Also additional factory installed options or dealer installed options must be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle Refer to the Tire and Loading Information plac ard in the Tire Safety Information section of this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupa
263. pped with four wheel disc brakes gt x lt Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seal Inspect the PCV valve replace if necessary not required if previously changed Replace the make up air filter Adjust the generator drive belt tension Change the automatic transaxle fluid and filter gt Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102 000 miles 170 000 km XM lt gt lt gt lt M A l N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 x lt x EN MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 363 Miles 75 000 78 000 81 000 84 000 87 000 90 000 Kilometers 125 000 130 000 135 000 140 000 145 000 150 000 Change engine oil and engine oil filter if not re X X X X X X placed at three months Rotate tires X X X Inspect the brake linings X Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped with X four wheel disc brakes Inspect the engine air cleaner filter replace as nec essary Replace the engine air cleaner filter Replace the spark plugs Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals M A N T E N A N C E S C H E D U L E S 8 x lt x Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary Not required if previously changed 1 Inspect the make up air filter replace as necessary X Adjust t
264. ppropriate for the tire size listed Inflation Pressure This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for all loading conditions Curb Weight The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight of the vehicle with all fluids including vehicle fuel at full capacity conditions and with no occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle The front and rear curb weight values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are added Overloading The load carrying components springs tires wheels etc of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR The best way to figure out the total weight of your vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for operation Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that it is not over the GVWR ee STARTING AND OPERATING 277 Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and shorten useful service life Heavier suspension compo nents do not necessarily increase the vehicle s GVWR Loading To load your vehicle properly first figure out its empty weight Store heavier items down low and be sure you distribute their weight as evenly as possible Stow all loose items securely before driving Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way the brakes operate CAUTION Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
265. press the power door LOCK switch to lock the doors 4 A single chime will indicate the completion of the programming Auto Unlock If Equipped The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if 1 The Auto Unlock feature is enabled 30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 2 The shift lever was in gear and the vehicle speed returned to 0 mph 0 km h 3 The shift lever is in NEUTRAL or PARK 4 The driver door is opened 5 The doors were not previously unlocked 6 The vehicle speed is 0 mph 0 km h The Auto Unlock feature can be enabled or disabled Refer to Personal Settings Customer Programmable Features in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped section of this manual For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC the Auto Unlock Feature can be enabled or disabled by performing the following procedure 1 Close all doors and place the key in the ignition 2 Cycle the ignition switch between LOCK and ON and back to LOCK four times ending up in the LOCK position 3 Depress the power door UNLOCK switch to unlock the doors 4 Verify reprogramming by driving the vehicle NOTE Use the Auto Lock and Auto Unlock features in accordance with local laws Child Protection Door Lock System If Equipped To provide a safer environment for children riding in the rear seat the rear doors have the Child Protection Door Lock system To use the sys
266. pressure as required JUMP STARTING PROCEDURES WARNING e Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan when ever the hood is raised It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON You can be hurt by the fan Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started ignite and damage the converter and vehicle If the vehicle has a dis charged battery booster cables may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly so follow this procedure carefully 302 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES EM 1 Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical contact 2 When boosting from a battery in another vehicle park that vehicle within booster cable reach but without letting the vehicles touch Set parking brake place auto matic transaxle in PARK manual transaxle in NEU TRAL and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles 3 Turn off the heater radio and all unnecessary electrical loads 4 Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive terminal of the booster battery Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the dis charged battery WARNING e Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution do not allow battery flui
267. r wheel Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or damage to your vehicle e Always park on a firm level surface as far from the edge of the roadway as possible before raising the vehicle NOTE Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the vehicle is being jacked Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be raised Set the parking brake firmly and shift a automatic transmission into PARK or a manual transmission into REVERSE Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a jack Continued 298 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES WARNING Continued Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a jack Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change If working on or near a roadway be extremely careful of motor traffic To assure that spare tires flat or inflated are securely stowed spares must be stowed with the valve stem facing the ground Turn on the hazard warning flasher Jack Warning Label 1 Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the stowage bag NOTE If equipped with a center cap that covers the wheel nuts pry off the cap using the small end of the lug wrench To reinstall the cap make sure it is properly lined up before pushing it onto the wheel Loosen but do not remove the wheel nuts by turning them to the left
268. r Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the path of the door or gate Only use this trans ceiver with a garage door opener that has a stop and reverse feature as required by Federal safety standards This includes most garage door opener models manufactured after 1982 Do not use a garage door opener without these safety features Call toll free 1 800 355 3515 or on the Internet at HomeLink Buttons www HomeLink com for safety information or as NOTE HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Secu sistance rity Alarm is active Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide a dan gerous gas Do not run your vehicle in the garage while training the transceiver Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death 81cb44fe 134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Programming Homelink Before You Begin If you have not trained any of the HomeLink buttons erase all channels before you begin training To do this press and hold the two outside buttons for up to 20 seconds until the red indicator flashes It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the handheld transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for more efficient training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage when programming Begin Programming 1 Turn the ignition switch to the ON RUN position 2 Hold the battery side of the handheld transmitter away fro
269. r Passing 131 Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills 132 ll Garage Door Opener If Equipped 132 Programming HomeLink 134 Gate Operator Canadian Programming 137 Security co kee as gua ee ee ig ea ps 137 Troubleshooting Tips llle 138 General Information 0 0 138 ll Power Sunroof If Equipped 139 Express Open Feature sess sonipa aes ams 139 Wind Buffeting Sunroof Maintenance Bi Electrical Power Outlets onunu auauua Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off Sires fas eg ERIS WEXKERLCRa EE Center Console Armrest Storage Bin 143 Storage l ockets s esse Ee a ira 144 Bl Console Features 0 0000007 144 ll Rear Shelf Panel If Equipped 145 Position 1 Top s e3xcc ed xy emen 146 Position 2 Middle 146 Position 3 Floor lessen 147 Position 4 Vertical llle 148 76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Position 5 Table liess 148 Rear Wiper Washer Switch If Equipped 151 H Rear Window Features 04 150 W Emergency Seatback Release Sedan 152 Rear Window Defroster 150 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77 MIRRORS Inside Day Night Mirror A two point pivot system allows f
270. r call is answered you will hear the audio Mute Un Mute Mute Off When you mute the UConnect system you will still be able to hear the conversation coming from the other party but the other party will not be able to hear you In order to mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute In order to un mute the UConnect system e Press the Voice Recognition button e Following the beep say Mute off Advanced Phone Connectivity Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone The UConnect system allows ongoing calls to be trans ferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect system without terminating the call To transfer an ongoing call from your UConnect paired cellular phone to the UConnect system or vice versa press the Voice Recog nition button and say Transfer Call Connect or Disconnect Link Between the UConnect System and Cellular Phone Your cellular phone can be paired with many different electronic devices but can only be actively connected with one electronic device at a time If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth connection between a UConnect paired cellular phone and the UConnect system follow the instructions de scribed in your cellular phone User s Manual 98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se List Paired Cellular Phone Names Press the PHONE button to begin After the Rea
271. r of the engine compartment on the passenger side and should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent not radiator antifreeze and operate the system for a few seconds to flush out the residual water WARNING Commercially available windshield washer solvents are flammable They could ignite and burn you Care must be exercised when filling or working around the washer solution 322 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Exhaust System The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust system If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged have a competent technician inspect the complete ex haust system and adjacent body areas for broken dam aged deteriorated or mispositioned parts Open seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger compartment In addition inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil change or lubrication Replace as required WARNING Exhaust gases can injure or kill They contain carbon monoxide CO which is colorless and odorless Breathing it can make you unconscious and can even tually poison you To avoid breathing CO refer to Section 2 Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle Safety Tips
272. railers weighing over 1 000 Ibs 454 kg with the optional Trailer Tow Prep Package See your authorized dealer service center for package content The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Max GTW towable for your given drivetrain TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION Class Max GTW Gross Trailer Wt Class I Light Duty 2 000 lbs 907 kg Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight GTW towable for your given drivetrain All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle Trailer Towing Weights Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain ee STARTING AND OPERATING 281 TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS Engine Transmission Frontal Area Ma s aas Trailer Max Tongue Wt 2 4L NA and 2 4L Turbo Automatic 20 sq ft 1 9 sq m 1000 Ibs 454 kg 110 Ibs 50 kg 2 4L NA and 2 4L Turb ME iid 20 sq ft 19 sq m 1000 Ibs 454 kg 110 Ibs 50 kg NA Naturally Aspirated The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occu
273. raints can be used rearward facing infant carriers and convertible child seats Both types of child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system This vehicle is not capable of accommodating the installation of a car bed used for carrying newborn babies at the right front passenger seat position If a car bed must be used to transport a newborn baby the car bed must be installed in the second seating row only The infant carrier is only used rearward facing in the vehicle It is recommended for children who weigh up to about 20 Ibs 9 kg Convertible child seats can be used either rearward facing or forward facing in the vehicle Convertible child seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearward facing direction than 62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M infant carriers do so they can be used rearward facing by children who weigh more than 9 kg 20 lbs but are less than one year old WARNING Rearward facing child seats must NEVER be used in the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger airbag An airbag deployment could cause severe injury or death to infants in this position e Children who weigh more than 20 Ibs 9 kg and who are older than one year can ride forward facing in the vehicle Forward facing child seats and convertible child seats used in the forward facing direction are for children who weigh 20 to 40 Ibs 9 to 18 kg and
274. rary use spare tires have limited tread life When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators the temporary use spare tire needs to be replaced Be sure to follow the warnings that apply to your spare Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel since the wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare Do not install more than one compact spare tire wheel on the vehicle at any given time CAUTION Because of the reduced ground clearance do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the compact spare installed Damage to the vehicle may result Limited Use Spare If Equipped The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use on your vehicle This tire is identified by a limited use spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare tire and wheel assembly This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle but it is not Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling Since it is not the same tire replace or repair the original tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity en STARTING AND OPERATING 259 WARNING The limited use spare tires are for emergency use only Installation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle handling With this tire do not drive m
275. re value 266 STARTING AND OPERATING ME CAUTION After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al ways reinstall the valve stem cap This will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor NOTE e TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition e TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure e Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability e TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure gauge even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS Telltale Light e Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in the tire Base System The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure lev els Sensors mounted to each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver Module ee STARTING AND OPERATING 267 NOTE It is particularly important for you to perform a monthly t
276. ring proper disposal Check with your local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your community To prevent ingestion by hu mans and animals do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant antifreeze in open containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground Clean up any ground spills immediately CAUTION If ethylene glycol engine coolant antifreeze is in gested by anyone contact a physician immediately Coolant Level The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for determining that the coolant level is adequate With the engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature the level of the engine coolant antifreeze in the bottle should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle The radiator normally remains completely full so there is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for engine coolant antifreeze freeze point or replacing en gine coolant antifreeze Advise your service attendant of this As long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month When additional engine coolant antifreeze is needed to maintain the proper level it should be added to the coolant bottle Do not overfill Points to Remember NOTE When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles a few kilometers of operation you may observe vapor ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 329 coming from the front of the engine compartment This is n
277. ring safety The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4 or 7 pin connector wiring harness Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector NOTE Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles wiring harness The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector Refer to the following four pin connector and seven pin connector illustrations 1 Female Pins 2 Male Pin 3 Ground 057003766 4 Pin Connector 4 Park 5 Left Stop Turn 6 Right Stop Turn S o 9 1 Battery 2 Backup Lamps 3 Right Stop Turn 4 Electric Brakes 7 Pin Connector 5 Ground 6 Left Stop Turn 7 Running Lamps ps ad ARA od 057003765 STARTING AND OPERATING 287 TOWING TIPS Before setting out on a trip practice turning stopping and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy traffic Towing Tips Automatic Transmission The OVERDRIVE DRIVE gear range can be selected when towing However if frequent shifting occurs while in this range 3rd gear should be selected NOTE Using the 3rd gear range while operating the vehicle under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up This action will also provide better engine braking The automatic transmission fluid and filter should be changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than
278. rized dealer as soon as possible ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57 WARNING Continued e Do not attempt to modify any part of your ad vanced airbag system The airbag may inflate Maintaining Your Airbag System WARNING e Modifications to any part of the airbag system could cause it to fail when you need it You could be injured if the airbag system is not there to protect you Do not modify the components or wiring including adding any kind of badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper right side of the instrument panel Do not modify the front bumper vehicle body structure or add aftermarket side steps or running boards Continued accidentally or may not function properly if modi fications are made Take your vehicle to an autho rized dealer for any advanced airbag system ser vice If your seat including your trim cover and cushion needs to be serviced in any way including re moval or loosening tightening of seat attachment bolts take the vehicle to your authorized dealer Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be used If it is necessary to modify an advanced airbag system for persons with disabilities contact your authorized dealer Continued 58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Continued Airbag Warning Light You will want to have the airbags ready to Do not place or hang any items such as add on 9 inflat
279. rking brake pull up firmly on the lever Always move the shift lever into the PARK position automatic transaxle or into the REVERSE po sition manual transaxle To release the parking brake apply the brake pedal pull up slightly on the lever then depress the button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the floor 240 STARTING AND OPERATING ME NOTE The parking brake lever will not release unless As an added precaution turn the front wheels toward the the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade Always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle WARNING e Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving failure to do so can lead to brake failure and an accident Never leave children alone in a vehicle Leaving unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of reasons A child or others could be Parking Brake seriously or fatally injured Don t leave the key in When parking on a hill it is important to set the parking the ignition A child could operate power win brake before placing the shift lever into PARK otherwise dows other controls or move the vehicle the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK ee STARTING AND OPERATING 241 BRAKE SYSTEM Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as s
280. rough the MP3 selection TUNE Control CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing the TUNE Control allows the adjustment of Tone Balance and Fade 198 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se AM FM Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Switches back to Radio mode RND PTY Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Pressing this button plays files randomly SET DIR Button CD Mode for MP3 Play Press the SET DIR Button to display folders when playing an MP3 discs that have a file folder structure Turn the TUNE control to display available folders or move through available folders Press the TUNE control to select a folder Buttons 1 6 CD Mode for MP3 Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Operating Instructions Hands Free Phone If Equipped Refer to Hands Free Phone in Section 3 of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Satellite Radio Mode If Equipped Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner s Manual Operating Instructions Video Entertainment System VES If Equipped Refer to separate Video Entertainment System VES Guide ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 199 SALES CODE REF AM FM CD SINGLE DISC RADIO WITH OPTIONAL SATELLITE RADIO AND HANDS FREE PHONE CAPABILITY NOTE The radio sales code is located on the lower right side of your radio faceplate 44 SEEK 4 RW FF 0 vor I L mE
281. rt from entering the valve stem which could damage the valve stem Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always cold tire inflation pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile 1 6 km after a three hour period The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with temperature changes Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi 7 kPa per 12 F 7 C of air temperature change Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in the Winter Example If garage temperature 68 F 20 C and the outside temperature 32 F 0 C then the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi 21 kPa which equals 1 psi 7 kPa for every 12 F 7 C for this outside temperature condition Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi 13 to 40 kPa during operation DO NOT reduce this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure will be too low Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds within posted speed limits Where speed limits or condi tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high speeds maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very impor
282. s and slide forward NOTE To carry items that may soil the carpeting the rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position 3 148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Position 4 Vertical Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the floor and slide downward Push the shelf panel forward to lock it into place Rear Shelf Panel Position 4 WARNING When in the vertical position the rear shelf panel should not be used as a barrier for large objects in the cargo area with the seatbacks folded down In an accident objects could strike the seatbacks or occu pants causing serious or fatal injury Position 5 Table With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved rearward to act as a serving counter 1 Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top rear guides Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into place es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149 2 Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and 3 Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as lower the shelf leg labeled on the rear scuff plate Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob Rear Shelf Panel Position 5 150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING Do not load objects over 100 Ibs 45 kg in position 5 table Failure to follow this warning could cause the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury REAR
283. safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle NOTE After you read the manual it should be stored in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be aware of all safety warnings When it comes to service remember that your authorized dealer knows your vehicle best has the factory trained technicians and genuine Mopar parts and is interested in your satisfaction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section contains the information you desire The detailed Index at the back of this Owner s Manual contains a complete listing of all subjects Consult the following table for a description of the symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout this Owner s Manual WATER INFUEL REAR WINDOW EXTERIOR BULB WIPER FAILURE s x a ML REAR WINDOW WINDSHIELD MASTER LIGHTING INTERMITTENT WIPER WASHER SWITCH FUEL FILL SE REAR WINDOW a DONE LIGHT Ld wa p ve WINDSHIELD ENGINE OL REAR WINDOW CLECTRICALLY PARK LIGHTS DEFROST HEATED QD W F BATTERY HEATED MIRROR WINDSHIELD INSTRUMENT PANEL CHARGING DEFROST ILLUMINATION GLOW PLUG FOWEM WINDSHIELD WIPER SIDE AIRBAG STEERING FLUD ANO WASHER SRS b RIRHRG E LFU MALFUNCTION TRANS ENGINE COOLANT SUPPLEMENTAL INDICATOR LIGHT OIL TEMP zD e H ZO e 0 FRONT FOG LIGHT HOOO RELEASE Qt Aa PASSENGER TEMPERATURE RESTRAINT SYSTEM AIRBAG OFF y
284. saxle may occur if the following precautions are not observed e Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle speed Do not shift from REVERSE PARK or NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed Before shifting into any gear make sure your foot is firmly on the brake pedal NOTE You must step on the brake pedal and depress the shift lever knob button before you will be able to move the shift lever out of PARK Four Speed Automatic Transaxle NOTE Under extreme cold temperatures 6 F 21 C and when in DRIVE transmission operation may be briefly limited to only 2nd gear operation Normal op eration will resume once the transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise shift schedule The transaxle electronics are self calibrating therefore the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt This is a normal condition and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles RESET Mode The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions If a condition is detected that could cause damage the transaxle shifts automatically into 2nd gear The transaxle remains in 2nd gear despite the forward gear selected PARK REVERSE and NEUTRAL will ee STARTING AND OPERATING 229 conti
285. secure a child restraint top tether strap Children too Large for Booster Seats Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend over the front of the seat when their back is against the seatback should use the lap shoulder belt in a rear seat ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69 e Make sure that the child is upright in the seat e The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug as possible e Check belt fit periodically A child s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of position If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck move the child closer to the center of the vehicle Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind their back Transporting Pets Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly injured or injure a passenger during panic braking or in a collision Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts ENGINE BREAK IN RECOMMENDATIONS A long break in period is not required for the engine in your vehicle Drive moderately during the first 300 miles 500 km After the initial 60 miles 100 km speeds up to 50 or 55 mph 80 or 90 km h are desirable While cruising brief full throttle acceleration within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break in Wid
286. sfully entered program mode All RKE transmitters that are to be programmed must be done so within 60 seconds of when the chime was heard 9 Using the RKE transmitter to be programmed press and release both the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons simultaneously 10 A single chime will be heard 11 Within four seconds of hearing the chime press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 12 A single chime will be heard 13 Repeat steps 8 through 10 to program up to six additional RKE transmitters 14 Turn the ignition to the OFF position 15 Your vehicle will remain in program mode up to 60 seconds from when the original chime was heard After 60 seconds all programmed RKE transmitters function normally NOTE If you do not have a programmed RKE trans mitter contact your authorized dealer for details General Information If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal distance check for these two conditions 26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M 1 A weak battery in the RKE transmitter The expected life of a battery is five years 2 Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station tower airport transmitter military base and some mobile or CB radios NOTE Changes or modifications not expressly ap proved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment RKE Transmitter Battery Service NOTE Perchlorate Material special
287. sh the Seat Belt Warning Light for 96 seconds or until the driver s seat belt is buckled BeltAlert will be reactivated if the 44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN driver s or front passenger s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h NOTE e BeltAlert can be enabled or disabled by your autho rized dealer e Chrysler LLC does not recommend deactivating the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert If BeltAlert is deactivated the Seat Belt Warning Light will continue to illuminate while the driver s seat belt remains unfastened Seat Belts and Pregnant Women We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts throughout their pregnancy Keeping the mother safe is the best way to keep the baby safe Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the abdomen That way the strong bones of the hips will take the force if there is a collision Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System SRS Airbag This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems The driver s front airbag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel The passenger s front airbag is mounted in the instrument panel above the glove compartment The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the airbag co
288. shbutton Memory When you are receiving a station that you wish to commit to pushbutton memory press the SET button The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window Select the button 1 6 you wish to lock onto this station and press and release that button If a button is not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET but ton the station will continue to play but will not be stored into pushbutton memory You may add a second station to each pushbutton by repeating the above procedure with this exception Press the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display window Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in both AM and FM This allows a total of 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations to be stored into pushbutton memory The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice Every time a preset button is used a corresponding button number will display Preset Buttons 1 6 Radio Mode These buttons tune the Radio to the stations that you commit to pushbutton memory 12 AM 12 FM and 12 Satellite if equipped stations ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 203 Operating Instructions CD Mode NOTE The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position to operate the radio Inserting The Compact Disc Single CD Player Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing up The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD Player and the CD i
289. sition and the seatback may not operate properly a UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL CONTENTS Mi Instrument Panel Features 158 Wi Instrument Cluster Base 159 Bl Instrument Cluster Premium 160 Bl Instrument Cluster Turbo 161 B Instrument Cluster Descriptions 162 ll Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC If Equipped i eis s Dp p aes 172 Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button 172 Compass Temperature Display 173 Odometer Display spere essee karines hs Trip Odometer ODO H Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC If Equipped eer Ree ien Be 176 EVIC Operation a cene dengti pgti nuaa 176 H Setting The Analog Clock 185 lll Sales Code RAQ AM FM CD 6 Disc Radio With Optional Satellite Radio Hands Free Phone And Video Entertainment Systems VES Capabilities s seess ssas sana tirisin 185 156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Operating Instructions Radio Mode Operation Instructions CD Mode For CD Audio Play ks cond os 6 des std A Load Eject Button CD Mode For CD Audio Play cascade accetto e es RUE ees Notes On Playing MP3 Files Operation Instructions CD Mode For MP3 Audio Play 4s ete se hes eet oen Load Eject Button CD Mode For MP3 Play ll Sales Code REF AM FM CD Single Disc Radio
290. splayed for 5 seconds Clock Setting Procedure 1 Press and hold the time button until the hours blink 2 Adjust the hours by turning the right side Tune Audio control 3 After the hours are adjusted press the right side Tune Audio control to set the minutes The minutes will begin to blink 4 Adjust the minutes using the right side Tune Audio control 5 To exit press any button knob or wait 5 seconds 188 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Se RW FF Radio Mode Pressing the Rewind Fast Forward button causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the direction of the arrows This feature operates in either AM FM or Satellite if equipped frequencies TUNE Control Radio Mode Turn the right side rotary control clockwise to increase or counter clockwise to decrease the frequency AM FM Button Radio Mode Press the button to select AM or FM Modes Setting the Tone Balance and Fade Press the rotary TUNE control and BASS will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Bass tones Press the rotary TUNE control a second time and MID will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Mid Range tones Press the rotary TUNE control a third time and TREBLE will display Turn the TUNE control to the right or left to increase or decrease the Treble tones Press the rotary TUNE control a fourth time and BAL ANCE will display Turn
291. ssories that can be plugged in draw power from the vehicle s battery even when not in use ie cellular phones etc Eventually if plugged in long enough the vehicle s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and or prevent engine starting Rear Power Outlet The Rear Power Outlet is powered directly by the battery As an option fuse 11 in the Integrated Power Module Continued es UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143 CAUTION Continued e Accessories that draw higher power i e coolers vacuum cleaners lights etc will discharge the battery even more quickly Only use these inter mittently and with greater caution After the use of high power draw accessories or long periods of the vehicle not being started with accessories still plugged in the vehicle must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle s battery STORAGE Center Console Armrest Storage Bin The center console provides a Sliding Armrest with two unique storage compartments under the lid Sliding Armrest Push the upper button on the front of the armrest to raise the upper cover Inside is an area to store a cell phone and other miscellaneous items Push the lower button on the front of the armrest and raise the armrest for access to 144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M the lower storage bin The lower storage area can be used CONSOLE FEATURES
292. steering pump may occur Power Steering Fluid Check Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined service interval is not required The fluid should only be checked if a leak is suspected abnormal noises are ee STARTING AND OPERATING 239 apparent and or the system is not functioning as antici pated Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho rized dealer No chemical flushes should be used in any power steering system only the approved lubricant may be used WARNING Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and with the engine off to prevent injury from moving parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading Do not overfill Use only manufacturers recommended power steering fluid If necessary add fluid to restore to the proper indicated level With a clean cloth wipe any spilled fluid from all surfaces Refer to Fluids Lubricants and Genuine Parts in Section 7 for the correct fluid type PARKING BRAKE When the parking brake is applied with the ignition on the BRAKE light in the instrument cluster will come on NOTE This light only shows that the parking brake is on It does not show the degree of brake application If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is moving a chime will sound to alert the driver The chime will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has returned to a stop Before leaving the vehicle make sure that the parking brake is set To set the pa
293. stem To Program Additional RKE Transmitters Each vehicle is shipped from the assembly plant with two RKE transmitters programmed only for that vehicle A total of eight RKE transmitters can be programmed to your vehicle through the use of a currently programmed RKE transmitter NOTE If vehicle is equipped with the optional EVIC in the instrument cluster the RKE transmitters may also be programmed through the EVIC display Use the following procedure to program additional RKE transmitters if the vehicle is not equipped with Sentry Key NOTE When entering program mode using currently programmed RKE transmitter all other programmed transmitters will be erased and you will have to repro gram them for your vehicle 1 Gather every transmitter that is to be used with the vehicle including any transmitters that are currently programmed 2 Enter your vehicle and close all doors 3 Fasten your seatbelt Fastening the seatbelt will cancel any chimes that may confuse you during this program ming procedure 4 Place the key into the ignition ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25 5 Turn the ignition to the ON position Do not start the engine 6 Press and hold the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter 7 After holding the UNLOCK button for four seconds also press the PANIC button within six seconds 8 When a single chime is heard release both buttons The chime is an indication that you have succes
294. switch the headlights to high beam and pull toward yourself normal position to return to low beam 25 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Button If Equipped Pushing this button will switch between the different EVIC functions Press the CMTC reset button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units 26 Compass Mini Trip Computer CMTC or Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC Display If Equipped On vehicles equipped with Electronic Vehicle Informa tion Center EVIC when the appropriate conditions exist this display shows the EVIC messages Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center later in this section 172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M On vehicles equipped with Compass Mini Trip Com puter CMTC the display provides the outside tempera ture one of eight compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is facing and the current radio station Refer to Compass Mini Trip Computer later in this section COMPASS MINI TRIP COMPUTER CMTC IF EQUIPPED NOTE The compass on your vehicle is self calibrating eliminating the need to manually calibrate the compass The Compass Mini Irip Computer features a driver interactive display displays information on outside tem perature compass direction and trip information The display is located on the lower left part of the cluster belo
295. t Pattern Use each gear in numerical order do not skip a gear Be sure the shift lever is in 1st gear not 3rd gear when starting from a standing position Damage to the clutch can result from starting in 3rd 226 STARTING AND OPERATING EBENEN For most city driving you will find it easier to use only the lower gears For steady highway driving with light accelerations 5th gear is recommended Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged This will cause abnormal wear on the clutch Never move the shift lever into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop NOTE During cold weather until the transaxle lubri cant is warm you may experience slightly higher shift efforts This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy it should be upshifted as listed in Table 1 Table 1 Manual Transaxle Normal Acceleration and Cruise Shift Speeds in MPH km h Engine Mode 1t02 2to3 3to4 4to5 2 4L Accel Non eration 15 24 25 40 40 65 45 72 Turbo Cruise 15 24 25 40 42 68 45 72 For improved performance your manual transaxle may be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in Table 2 within legal speed limits Table 2 Manual Transaxle Maximum Performance Shift Speeds in MPH k
296. t belt might collision you could slide under the seat belt and be not be properly adjusted and you could be injured seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked only when the vehicle is parked Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally injured Use the recliner only when the vehicle is parked ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109 The seat switch is on the outboard side of the seat near This seat also has a manual recline lever located just to the floor Use this switch to move the seat up or down the rear of the power seat switch To recline lean forward forward or rearward or to tilt the seat slightly before lifting the lever then lean back to the desired position and release the lever Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to its normal position zx Power Seat Switch Recliner Control Lever 110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M Manual Lumbar If Equipped Folding Front Passenger Seat If Equipped The Lumbar adjustment is located on the inboard side of The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to the driver s seat To increase support rotate the handle provide additional cargo space down To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever located on th
297. t in civil penalties being assessed nance Have the exhaust system inspected every time against you EN STARTING AND OPERATING 273 the vehicle is raised Have any abnormal conditions repaired promptly Until repaired drive with all side windows fully open e Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex haust gases from entering the vehicle ADDING FUEL The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2 in 50 mm inside the opening If using a portable container itshould have a flexible nozzle long enough to force open the restricting door Fuel Filler Cap Gas Cap The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door on the passen ger s side of the vehicle If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle NOTE When removing the fuel filler cap lay the cap tether in the hook located on the fuel filler cap door reinforcement Gas Cap Tether Hook NOTE If the gas cap is lost or damaged be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle 274 STARTING AND OPERATING Se CAUTION WARNING Continued e Never add fuel when the engine is running This is in violation of most state and federal fire regula tions and doing so will cause the malfunction e Damage to the fuel system or emissions control system could result from using an improper fuel tank filler tube cap gas cap A poorly fitting gas cap could let imp
298. t outlets with a small amount through the defrost outlet Mix Ge Air is directed through the floor defrost and side window demist outlets This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the windshield This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield Defrost Qv Air is directed through the windshield and side window demist outlets Use this mode with maxi mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213 NOTE The air conditioning compressor operates in both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if the A C button has not been pressed and the indicator lamp is off This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield To improve fuel economy use these modes only when necessary CAUTION If the Defroster is not working the windshield and windows may become fogged and your visibility will be greatly diminished See your authorized dealer as soon as possible Air Outlets The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control airflow NOTE For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen gers the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed so that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward the left rear passenger Temperature
299. t to retract fully comfortable and not resting on your neck The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41 WARNING e If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt still can not be pulled out the A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and Automatic Locking Retractor ALR system may be leave you with no protection Inspect the belt system activated To reset this feature you must let all of the periodically checking for cuts frays or loose parts belt webbing return into the retractor You will not be Damaged parts must be replaced immediately Do able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing not disassemble or modify the system Seat belt has been returned back into the retractor assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they WARNING have been damaged bent retractor torn webbing ick The rear center lap shoulder belt is equipped with a lockout feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in the fully upright and locked position when occupied If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked Rear Center Lap Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock Out This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever the rear seatback is not fully latched This prevents someone from wearing the rear center lap shoulder belt when the rear seatback is not fully latched and the rear center lap shoulder belt can be pulled out
300. tandard equipment In the event power assist is lost for any reason for example repeated brake applications with the engine off the brakes will still function How ever the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required with the power system oper ating WARNING Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and possibly an accident Driving with your foot resting or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally high brake temperatures excessive lining wear and possible brake damage You wouldn t have your full braking capacity in an emergency If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa bility the remaining system will still function with some loss of overall braking effectiveness This will be evident by increased pedal travel during application and greater pedal force required to slow or stop In addition if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops the Brake Warning Indicator will light WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger ous A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your vehicle harder to control You could have an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately 242 STARTING AND OPERATING ME ANTI LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM ABS IF 3 EQUIPPED WARNING Continued Continued
301. tant Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle ee STARTING AND OPERATING 257 loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera Radial Ply Tires tion Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for recommended safe operating speeds loading WARNING and cold tire inflation pressures WARNING Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle poorly The instability could cause an accident Al ways use radial ply tires in sets of four Never combine them with other types of tires High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi mum load is dangerous The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail You could have a serious accident Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in maximum capacity at continuous speeds above the tread area because of sidewall flexing Consult your 75 mph 120 km h authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs Compact Spare Tire If Equipped The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with radial tires It is engineered to be used on your style vehicle only Since this tire has limited tread life the original tire should be repaired or replaced and rein stalled at the first opportunity 258 STARTING AND OPERATING ME WARNING Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use only With these tires do not drive more than 50 mph 80 km h Tempo
302. te UConnect is a voice activated hands free in vehicle communications system UConnect allows you to dial a phone number with your cellular phone using simple voice commands e g Call Mike Work or Dial 248 555 1212 Your cellular phone s audio is trans mitted through your vehicle s audio system the system will automatically mute your radio when using the UConnect system NOTE The UConnect system requires a cellular phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands Free Profile Ver sion 0 96 or higher See the UConnect website for supported phones NOTE For UConnect customer support visit the following websites e www chrysler com uconnect e www dodge com uconnect e www jeep com uconnect e or call 1 877 855 8400 UConnect allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to mute the system s microphone for private conversation ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81 The UConnect system is driven through your Bluetooth Hands Free profile cellular phone UConnect features Bluetooth technology the global standard that enables different electronic devices to con nect to each other without wires or a docking station so UConnect works no matter where you stow your cellu lar phone be it your purse pocket or briefcase as long as your phone is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle s UConnect
303. te mee AE 108 74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE Se Manual Lumbar If Equipped 110 Lights On Reminder 123 Folding Front Passenger Seat If Equipped 110 Fog Lights If Equipped 123 Adjustable Head Restraints 111 Turn Signal Operation 5 123 Heated Seats If Equipped ut High Beam Low Beam Select Switch 124 Holding MEE va Flash To Pass 2 sees cc eee eee 125 ru EE 14 W windshield Wipers And Washers 126 A ene ae Sen at alee k4 Windshield Washers oooi 126 a ehe dd qe i Mist Feature isses eee 126 B Light Rr 120 Dicen Wiser Syste ssenari 127 DU Ud ae Saini phe te itvths yy H Tilt Steering Column lesse 128 e PEE n H Electronic Speed Control If Equipped 129 FUSE ono Iustus Cane FISH ge sie os To Activate ccce 129 Daytime Running Lights DRL If To Set At A Desired Speed 130 Equipped s eua dere EE E EET 123 ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75 To Deactivate ioo Sule dae Y ue ora em es 130 To Resume Speed 0000 130 To Vary The Speed Setting 130 Manual Transaxle esses 131 To Accelerate Fo
304. tem open each rear door and move the control up to engage When the system on a door is ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31 engaged that door can only be opened by using the WARNING outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the unlocked position Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision Remember that the rear doors can only be opened from the outside when the Child Door Protection Lock is engaged NOTE For emergency exit with the system engaged move the lock plunger up UNLOCKED position roll down the window and open the door with the outside door handle POWER WINDOWS The power window switches are located on the instru i ment panel above the radio The top left switch controls Child Lock Control the left front window and the top right switch controls the right front window The lower left switch controls the left rear window and the lower right switch controls the right rear window 32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M The window lock switch is located between the window WARNING switches that allows you to disable the rear window switches that are located at the back of the center floor Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the console ignition switch Occupants particularly unattended children can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death Auto Down
305. the compact disc in random order to provide an interesting change of pace Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track Press and hold the FF button to fast forward through the tracks Release the FF button to stop the fast forward feature 194 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL M Press the RND button a second time to stop Random Play Buttons 1 6 CD MODE for CD Audio Play Selects disc positions 1 6 for Play Load Eject Notes On Playing MP3 Files The radio can play MP3 files however acceptable MP3 file recording media and formats are limited When writing MP3 files pay attention to the following restric tions Supported Media Disc Types The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are CD ROM CD R and CD RW Supported Medium Formats File Systems The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension When reading discs recorded using formats other than ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2 the radio may fail to read files properly and may be unable to play the file nor mally UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported The radio uses the following limits for file systems e Maximum number of directory levels 15 e Maximum number of files 255 e Maximum number of folders 100 e Maximum number of characters in file folder names e Level 1 12 including a separator and a 3 character extension e Level 2 31 including a s
306. the LATCH feature can also be used to hold infant and child restraint systems Refer to the Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren LATCH system explanation in this section Please pay close attention to the information in this section It tells you how to use your restraint system properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as possible WARNING In a collision you and your passengers can suffer much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver even on short trips Someone on the road may be a poor driver 36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M and cause a collision that includes you This can happen far away from home or on your own street Research has shown that seat belts save lives and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all times Lap Shoulder Belts All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap shoulder belts The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during very sudden stops or collisions This
307. the UConnect system from idle simply press the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for directions All UConnect system sessions begin with a press of the PHONE button on the radio control head Cancel Command At any prompt after the beep you can say Cancel and you will be returned to the main menu However in a few instances the system will take you back to the previous menu Pair Link UConnect System to a Cellular Phone To begin using your UConnect system you must pair your compatible Bluetooth enabled cellular phone To complete the pairing process you will need to refer ence your cellular phone Owner s Manual The UConnect website may also provide detailed instruc tions for pairing The following are general phone to UConnect system pairing instructions e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Setup Phone Pairing om e When prompted after the beep say Pair a Phone and follow the audible prompts You will be asked to say a four digit Personal Identi fication Number PIN which you will later need to enter into your cellular phone You can enter any four digit PIN You will not need to remember this PIN after the initial pairing process For identification purposes you will be prompted to give the UConnect system a name for your cellular phone Each cellular phone that is paired should be given a unique phone name 84 UNDERSTANDING THE F
308. the lock engages ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15 To Release the Steering Wheel Lock Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine If the key is difficult to turn move the wheel slightly to the right or left to disengage the lock NOTE If you turned the wheel to the right to engage the lock you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to disengage it If you turned the wheel to the left to engage the lock turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System This system prevents the key from being removed unless the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob pushbutton is out It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON positions and the brake pedal is depressed SENTRY KEY IF EQUIPPED Sentry Key Immobilizer System The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine The system will shut the engine off after two seconds of running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle This system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic chip transponder embedded into them Only keys that have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate the vehicle The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be armed or activated Operation of the system is automatic regardless if the vehicle is locked or unlocked During normal operation the Ve
309. ting 222 Starting Procedures auis hae See alk oan dae 222 Steering Power ick uv XGA che eG Rak S 238 Tilt Colum 3v be BES ik ox hee oe dots 128 Wheel LOK s s xau RC eR REUS 14 DLOFage doc Ra d nea hee eere ebd edges 143 345 Stuck Freeing sss e nn 303 oun ROOP vba 4i EVEN Es 139 Sun Visor Extension llle 79 Supplemental Restraint System Airbag 44 Synthetic Engine Oil rir tesise iaae iea 316 Tachometer sse 163 Temperature Gauge Engine Coolant 162 293 Tether Anchor Child Restraint 65 Theft Alarm Security Alarm 19 Theft System Security Alarm 19 Tilt Steering Column ses sessed avessi aspas s 128 Tire and Loading Information Placard 250 Tire Identification Number TIN 249 Tir Markings i24 hb eR 245 Tire Safety Information 06 245 jo ES 71 254 389 Aging Life of Tires csse m 260 Alt Pressure ia 6 oye iode PER Ren 254 Chamnso sso voies a aed Sit tee d bust Ba 262 Changing e idee UE LIE er RESTER eg 294 Compact Spare 2s Racer oe eta 257 Flat Changing selle 301 General Information lille 254 High Speed sie ienen teet aa Oen 256 Inflation Pressures 406 INDEX BEEN Jackie shes ee Sle erp EE Step ete ae 294 Life of Tires llle 260 Load Capacity lessen 250 251 Pressure Monitor System TPMS 264 Pressure War
310. tinue to operate normally if the BRAKE Warning Light is not on If the ABS light is on the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti Lock brakes If the ABS light does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position have the bulb repaired as soon as possible If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light remain on the Anti Lock brakes ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD systems are not function ing properly Immediate repair to the ABS system at an authorized dealer is required STARTING AND OPERATING 243 When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph 11 km h you may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related motor noises These noises are the system per forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system is working properly This self check occurs each time the vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph 11 km h ABS is activated during braking under certain road or stopping conditions ABS inducing conditions can in clude ice snow gravel bumps railroad tracks loose debris or panic stops You also may experience the following when the brake system goes into Anti Lock e The ABS motor running it may continue to run for a short time after the stop e Aclicking sound of solenoid valves e Brake pedal pulsations 244 STARTING AND OPERATING Se e Aslight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end of the stop
311. tion button while a call is in progress and make a second phone call as described under Making a Second Call While Current Call in Progress After the second call has established press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a double beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into one conference call Call Termination To end a call in progress momentarily press the PHONE button Only the active call s will be terminated and if there is a call on hold it will become the new active call If the active call is terminated by the far end a call on hold may not become active automatically This is cell phone dependent To bring the call back from hold press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep Redial e Press the PHONE button to begin 92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE M e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Redial e The UConnect system will call the last number that was dialed from your cellular phone NOTE This may not be the last number dialed from the UConnect system Call Continuation Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the UConnect system after the vehicle ignition key has been switched to OFF Call continuation functionality avail able on the vehicle can be any one of three types e After the ignition key is switched to OFF a call can continue on the UConnect system either until the call ends or until the vehicle battery conditi
312. to move it up or down to make sure that it is locked in position Seat Belt Pretensioners The seat belts for both front seating positions are equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision These devices improve the performance of the seat belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early in a collision Pretensioners work for all size occupants including those in child restraints NOTE These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the occupant The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re straint Controller ORC see the following Airbag sec tion Like the front airbags the pretensioners are single use items After a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners both must be replaced Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System BeltAlert If the driver s or front passenger s seat belt has not been buckled within 60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph 8 km h the Enhanced Warning System BeltAlert will alert the driver or front passenger to buckle their seat belt The driver should also instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat belts If the driver unbuckles the seat belt while the vehicle is in motion an immediate chime will be heard and BeltAlert will continue to chime and fla
313. ts of water Battery gas is flammable and explosive Keep flame or sparks away from the battery Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output greater than 12 volts Do not allow cable clamps to touch each other Continued ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 319 WARNING Continued CAUTION Continued e Battery posts terminals and related accessories e If a fast charger is used while the battery is in contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands the vehicle disconnect both vehicle battery cables after handling before connecting the charger to battery Do not use a fast charger to provide starting voltage as battery damage can result CAUTION It is essential when replacing the cables on the Air Conditioner Maintenance battery that the positive cable is attached to the For best possible performance your air conditioner positive post and the negative cable is attached to should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer the negative post Battery posts are marked posi at the start of each warm season This service should tive and negative and identified on the include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance battery case Cable clamps should be tight on the test Drive belt tension should also be checked at this EE terminal posts and free of corrosion Apply grease time to posts and clamps after tightening Continued 320 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING
314. tton is pressed after four seconds press the LOCK button Release both buttons 3 Test the Flash Lights with Lock feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the ignition in the LOCK position and the key removed NOTE Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmit ter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Security Alarm Opening a door with the Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Security Alarm The Flash Lights on Lock Unlock features can be BS reactivated by repeating this procedure Panic Alarm The Panic Alarm mode flashes the park lights and sounds the horn for about three minutes or until the alarm is turned off Using The Panic Alarm To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF press and hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one second and release When the Panic Alarm is on the headlights and park lights will flash the horn will pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on 24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE Se The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph 8 km h or greater NOTE When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing the PANIC button a second time you may have to be closer to the vehicle due to the Radio Frequency RF noises of the sy
315. ual Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion Protection of Body And Paint from Corrosion Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo graphic locations and usage Chemicals that make roads passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle Outside parking which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint metal trim and under body protection The following maintenance recommendations will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle What Causes Corrosion Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle The most common causes are e Road salt dirt and moisture accumulation e Stone and gravel impact e Insects tree sap and tar 336 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE EE Salt in the air near sea coast localities and Atmospheric fallout industrial pollutants Washing Wash your vehicle regularly Always wash your ve hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash or a mild car wash soap and rinse the panels completely with clear water If insects tar or other similar deposits have accumu lated on your vehicle use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove Us
316. uid all brake seal components could be damaged causing partial or complete brake failure Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed container to avoid contamination from foreign mat ter Automatic Transaxle The automatic transaxle and differential assembly are contained within a single housing The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced Operation with an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the transaxle and the fluid Fluid Level Check Use the following procedure to check the automatic transaxle fluid level properly 1 Park the vehicle on level ground 2 Run the engine at curb idle speed for a minimum of 60 seconds 3 Apply the parking brake fully 4 Place the shift lever momentarily in each gear posi tion ending with the shift lever in PARK 5 Wipe the area around the dipstick clean to eliminate the possibility of dirt entering the transaxle 6 Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot or cold Hot fluid is approximately 180 F 82 C which is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle is EN MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 333 driven at least 15 miles 24 km Hot fluid cannot be held CAUTION comfortably between the fingertips Cold fluid is at a temperature below 80 F 27 C e Using a transmission fluid other than the manu facturer s recommended fluid may cause deterio ration in transmission shift quality
317. uired service for your vehicle First is Maintenance Schedule B All Engines It is for vehicles that are operated under the conditions that are listed below and at the beginning of the schedule e Day and night temperatures are below 32 F 0 C e Stop and go driving e Extensive engine idling e Driving in dusty conditions Short trips of less than 10 miles 16 km e More than 50 percent of your driving is at sustained high speeds during hot weather above 90 F 32 C Trailer towing t ee MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 355 e Taxi police or delivery service commercial ser Second is Maintenance Schedule A Non vice t Turbocharged It is for vehicles that are not operated under any of the conditions listed under Maintenance Schedule B All Engines Third is Maintenance Schedule A Turbocharged It is NOTE for vehicles that are not operated under any of the e If ANY of these apply to you then change your engine conditions listed under Maintenance Schedule B All oil every 3 000 miles 5 000 km or three months Engines whichever comes first and follow Maintenance Schedule B All Engines in this section e Off road or desert operation e If equipped for and operating with E 85 ethanol fuel Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi tions Where time and mileage are listed follow the e If ANY of these apply to you then flush and replace interval that occurs first t
318. ulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven Therefore if the odometer reading is changed during repair or replacement be sure to keep a record of the reading before and after the service so that the correct mileage can be determined Vehicle Warning Messages When the appropriate conditions exist door gate LoW TirE CHAngE OlL or GASCAP will display in the odometer mm NOTE If the instrument cluster is equipped with the optional Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC then all warnings including Low Tire Door Ajar and Liftgate Ajar will only display in the EVIC Refer to Electronic Vehicle Information Center EVIC in this section for specific messages LoW TirE When the appropriate condition exists the odometer display will toggle between LoW and TirE for three cycles Hou 166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL GASCAP If the vehicle diagnostic system detects a leak or change in the evaporative system or the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged the words GASCAP will display in the odometer If this occurs tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer reset button to turn off the GASCAP message Refer to Onboard Diagnostic System OBDII in Section 7 of this manual for more information If the problem con tinues the message will appear the
319. unable to resolve the concern you may contact the manufacturer s customer center Any communication to the manufacturer s customer cen ter should include the following information e Owner s name and address e Owner s telephone number home and office e Authorized dealership name e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Vehicle delivery date and mileage Chrysler LLC Customer Center P O Box 21 8004 Auburn Hills MI 48321 8004 Phone 800 992 1997 Chrysler Canada Inc Customer Center P O Box 1621 Windsor Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone 800 465 2001 In Mexico contact Av Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma 1240 Sante Fe C P 05109 Mexico D E In Mexico City 5081 7568 Outside Mexico City 1 800 505 1300 EN F YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 385 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired TDD TTY To assist customers who have hearing difficulties the manufacturer has installed special TDD Telecommuni cation Devices for the Deaf equipment at its customer center Any hearing or speech impaired customer who has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter TTY in the United States can communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1 800 380 CHRY Service Contract You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer s servi
320. urities into indicator Hebi to tirn gn A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a portable container that is inside of a vehicle You could be burned Always place gas containers on the ground while filling the fuel system A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunc tion Indicator Light to turn on To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling do not top off the fuel tank after filling When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full NOTE e Tighten the gas cap until you hear a clicking sound This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened properly The Malfunction Indicator Light MIL in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not secured properly Make sure that the gas cap is tight ened each time the vehicle is refueled e Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank filled Continued ee STARTING AND OPERATING 275 e When the fuel nozzle clicks or shuts off the fuel tank is full Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel filler cap is loose improperly installed or damaged a gASCAP message will be displayed in the Odometer Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster Refer to Instru ment Cluster Description in Section 4 of this manual Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer trip odometer reset button to turn the
321. urs stop the vehicle turn off the engine and allow it to cool Service including a tune up to manufacturer s specifica tions should be obtained immediately 324 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE M To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in motion Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the vehicle Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires disconnected for prolonged period COOLING SYSTEM WARNING e When working near the radiator cooling fan dis connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition switch to the OFF position The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the ignition switch is in the ON position Continued WARNING Continued e You or others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant antifreeze or steam from your radiator If you see or hear steam coming from under the hood do not open the hood until the radiator has had time to cool Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the radiator is hot Coolant Checks Check engine coolant antifreeze protection every 12 months before the onset of freezing weather where applicable If the engine coolant antifreeze is dirty or rusty in appearance the system should be drained flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant anti freeze Check the front of the A C condenser for any accumul
322. usly stored name entry in the UConnect phonebook ee UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85 or downloaded phonebook To learn how to store a name in the phonebook refer to Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook in the phonebook e The UConnect system will confirm the name and then dial the corresponding phone number which may appear in the display of certain radios Add Names to Your UConnect Phonebook NOTE Adding names to the UConnect phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion e Press the PHONE button to begin e After the Ready prompt and the following beep say Phonebook New Entry e When prompted say the name of the new entry Use of long names helps the voice recognition and it is recommended For example say Robert Smith or Robert instead of Bob e When prompted enter the number designation e g Home Work Mobile or Pager This will allow you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook entry if desired When prompted recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that you are adding After you are finished adding an entry into the phone book you will be given the opportunity to add more phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the main menu The UConnect system will allow you to enter up to 32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to four associated phone numbers and designations Each language has a separate 32 name phoneb
323. ve an accident Have the vehicle checked immediately Vehicles equipped with the Anti Lock Brake System ABS are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution EBD In the event of an EBD failure the Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS Light Immediate repair to the ABS system is required es UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169 Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON position The light should illuminate for approxi mately two seconds The light should then turn off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected If the light does not illuminate have the light inspected by an authorized dealer The light also will turn on when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switch in the ON position NOTE This light shows only that the parking brake is applied It does not show the degree of brake application 16 Seat Belt Reminder Light When the ignition switch is first turned ON this light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb check During the bulb check if the driver s seat belt is unbuckled a chime will sound After the bulb check or when driving if the driver s seat belt remains unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime will sound Refer to Occupant Restraints in Section 2 for more information 17 Engine Temperature Warning Light E This light warns of
324. vers ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45 This vehicle may also be equipped with side airbags to protect the driver front and rear passengers sitting next to a window If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags they are located above the side windows The trim covering the side airbags is labeled SRS AIRBAG NOTE Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim but they will open to allow airbag deployment WARNING e Do not drill cut or tamper with the knee impact 022605983 i blocker panels in any way Front Panel SRS Features e Do not mount any accessories to the knee blocker 1 Driver Airbag 3 Passenger Knee Blocker panel such as alarm lights stereos citizens band 2 Passenger Airbag 4 Driver Knee Blocker radios etc 46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE M WARNING e Do not put anything on or around the airbag covers or attempt to manually open them You may damage the airbags and you could be injured in a collision because the airbags are not there to protect you These protective covers for the airbag cushions are designed to open only when the airbags are inflating If your vehicle is equipped with left and right window bags do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to block the location of the Side Airbag Inflatable Curtains SABIC The area where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free from any obstructions Do not attach cup
325. w the fuel and engine temperature gauge Compass Mini Trip Computer Reset Button CMTC Reset Button Secondary Reset Button Press the left Compass Temperature RESET button to scroll through sub menus i e Trip Functions AVG Fuel Economy DTE Elapsed Time and Units US or Metric When the appropriate conditions exist the following messages will display in the window below the fuel and engine temperature gauge Eaeeecaices Eight point compass headings are displayed N S E W NE NW SE SW TE LI uou edu Temperature Fahrenheit or Celsius AVG sess Average Fuel Economy US or Metric DTE ono eR erm Distance to Empty ED i pare toi bre 9n Red Elapsed Time NOTE Temperature and Average Fuel Economy can be changed from U S or Metric by pressing and holding the left secondary pushbutton ee UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173 Compass Temperature Display Compass Variance Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic North and Geographic North To ensure compass accu racy the compass variance should be properly set accord ing to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle will be driven When properly set the compass will automatically account for this difference NOTE Magnetic and battery powered devices such as cell phones IPOD s radar detectors PDA s and laptops should be kept away from the top of the instrument panel This is where the compass module is located and such devices may inter
326. w water to get into the Integrated Power Module and possibly result in an electrical system failure When replacing a blown fuse it is important to use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may result in a dangerous electrical system over load If a properly rated fuse continues to blow it indicates a problem in the circuit that must be corrected ee MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 345 VEHICLE STORAGE If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21 days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery e Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution Center labeled IOD Ignition Off Draw e Disconnect the negative cable from the battery REPLACEMENT BULBS LIGHT BULBS Interior Bulb No Center Console Floor Lamp T37 Climate Controls 0 0 6233137 Console Gear Selector PC194 Dome Light Sedan srs oser a neri erini osi T579 Dome Light Sport Bar Lights Convertible T904 Instrument Cluster Illumination LL 74 Overhead Reading Light Overhead Console T1037 Overhead Reading Light Rearview Mirror T192 Rear CargO 4 ceri edra HERE ORA e Hed oe T906 VISOr Vanity s ied de dudes dee ea eed 6501966 All the interior bulbs are brass or glass wedge base Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not be used for replacement LIGHTS BULBS Exterior Bulb No Low B
327. who are older than one year These child seats are also held in the vehicle by the lap shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system ee THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63 WARNING e The belt positioning booster seat is for children weigh ing more than 40 lbs 18 kg but who are still too small to fit the vehicle s seat belts properly If the child e Improper installation can lead to failure of an cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle s cushion infant or child restraint It could come loose in a while the child s back is against the seatback they collision The child could be badly injured or should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat The child killed Follow the manufacturer s directions ex and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap actly when installing an infant or child restraint shoulder belt Some booster seats are equipped with a A rearward facing child restraint should only be front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap used in a rear seat A rearward facing child re portion straint in the front seat may be struck by a deploy ing passenger airbag which may cause severe or NOTE For additional information refer to c fatal injury to the infant www nhtsa gov or www seatcheck org 64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE EBENEN Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child restraint Before buying any restraint system make sure that it has a l
328. you ve had an accident or work done that is not on your maintenance log let the service advisor know Be Reasonable With Requests If you list a number of items and you must have your vehicle by the end of the day discuss the situation with the service advisor and list the items in order of priority At many authorized dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal daily charge If you need a rental it is advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally interested in your satisfaction We want you to be happy with our products and services Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer They know you and the vehicle best and are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality service The manufacturer s authorized dealers have the facilities factory trained technicians special tools and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner 384 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE M This is why you should always talk to an authorized dealer s service manager first Most matters can be re solved with this process e If for some reason you are still not satisfied talk to the general manager or owner of the authorized dealer ship They want to know if you need assistance e If an authorized dealership is

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

gebrauchsanweisungen istruzioni per l`uso  Philips FWD185 DVD Mini Hi-Fi System  RALLYE FRANCOPHONE SUR TV5  取扱説明書  Information sur les extensions de code  取扱説明書（PDF：697KB）  Gama decoración - Pinturas Dyrup  MX44UHD User Manual - HomeCinemaSolution  calendrier des formations    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file